Operation Manual
Embroidery and Sewing Machine
Product Code: 882-W70
Be sure to read this document before using the machine.
We recommend that you keep this document nearby for future reference.
1
Thank you for purchasing this machine. Before using this
machine, carefully read the “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS”, and then study this manual for the
correct operation of the various functions.
In addition, after you have finished reading this manual,
store it where it can quickly be accessed for future
reference.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in an
increased risk of personal injury or damage to property,
including through fire, electrical shock, burns or
suffocation.
Please read these safety instructions before attempting to
use the machine.
DANGER
- To reduce the risk of electric shock
1Always unplug the machine from the
electrical outlet immediately after using,
cleaning, when making any user
servicing adjustments mentioned in this
manual, or if you are leaving the
machine unattended.
WARNING
- To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electric shock, or
injury to persons.
2Always unplug the machine from the electrical
outlet when removing covers, or when making any
adjustments mentioned in the instruction manual.
• To unplug the machine, switch the machine to the
symbol “O” position to turn it off, then grasp the
plug and pull it out of the electrical outlet. Do not
pull on the cord.
• Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet.
Do not use an extension cord.
• Always unplug your machine if the power is cut.
3Electrical Hazards:
• This machine should be connected to an AC power
source within the range indicated on the rating
label. Do not connect it to a DC power source or
inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power
source you have, contact a qualified electrician.
• This machine is approved for use in the country of
purchase only.
4Never operate this machine if it has a damaged cord
or plug, if it is not working properly, if it has been
dropped or damaged, or water is spilled on the unit.
Return the machine to the nearest authorized
Brother dealer for examination, repair, electrical or
mechanical adjustment.
• While the machine is stored or in use if you notice
anything unusual, such as an odor, heat,
discoloration or deformation, stop using the
machine immediately and unplug the power cord.
• When transporting the machine, be sure to carry it
by its handle. Lifting the machine by any other part
may damage the machine or result in the machine
falling, which could cause injuries.
• When lifting the machine, be careful not to make
any sudden or careless movements, otherwise you
may injure your back or knees.
5Always keep your work area clear:
• Never operate the machine with any air openings
blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the machine
and the foot controller free from the build up of lint,
dust, and loose cloth.
• Do not store objects on the foot controller.
• Never drop or insert any object into any opening.
• Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are
being used or where oxygen is being administered.
• Do not use the machine near a heat source, such as
a stove or iron; otherwise, the machine, power cord
or garment being sewn may ignite, resulting in fire
or an electric shock.
• Do not place this machine on an unstable surface,
such as an unsteady or slanted table, otherwise the
machine may fall, resulting in injuries.
INTRODUCTION
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
2
6Special care is required when sewing:
• Always pay close attention to the needle. Do not use
bent or damaged needles.
• Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special
care is required around the machine needle.
• Switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to
turn it off when making any adjustments in the
needle area.
• Do not use a damaged or incorrect needle plate, as
it could cause the needle to break.
• Do not push or pull the fabric when sewing, and
follow careful instruction when free motion stitching
so that you do not deflect the needle and cause it to
break.
7This machine is not a toy:
• Your close attention is necessary when the machine
is used by or near children.
• The plastic bag that this machine was supplied in
should be kept out of the reach of children or
disposed of. Never allow children to play with the
bag due to the danger of suffocation.
• Do not use outdoors.
8For a longer service life:
• When using and storing this machine, avoid direct
sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or
store the machine near a space heater, iron, halogen
lamp, or other hot objects.
• Use only neutral soaps or detergents to clean the
case. Benzene, thinner, and scouring powders can
damage the case and machine, and should never be
used.
• Always consult the Operation Manual when
replacing or installing any assemblies, the presser
feet, needle, or other parts to assure correct
installation.
9For repair or adjustment:
• If the light unit is damaged, it must be replaced by
an authorized Brother dealer.
• In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is
required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the
back of the Operation Manual to inspect and adjust
the machine yourself. If the problem persists, please
consult your local authorized Brother dealer.
Use this machine only for its intended use as described
in the manual.
Use accessories recommended by the manufacturer as
contained in this manual.
Use only the mouse designed specifically for this
machine.
The contents of this manual and specifications of this
product are subject to change without notice.
For additional product information and updates, visit
our website at www.brother.com
SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
This machine is intended
for household use.
FOR USERS IN COUNTRIES EXCEPT
CENELEC COUNTRIES
This appliance is not intended for use
by persons (including children) with
reduced physical, sensory or mental
capabilities, or lack of experience and
knowledge, unless they have been
given supervision or instruction
concerning use of the appliance by a
person responsible for their safety.
Children should be supervised to
ensure that they do not play with the
appliance.
FOR USERS IN CENELEC COUNTRIES
This appliance can be used by children
aged from 8 years and above and
persons with reduced physical, sensory
or mental capabilities or lack of
experience and knowledge if they have
been given supervision or instruction
concerning use of the appliance in a
safe way and understand the hazards
involved. Children shall not play with
the appliance. Cleaning and user
maintenance shall not be made by
children without supervision.
3
FOR USERS IN THE UK,
EIRE, MALTA AND
CYPRUS ONLY
IMPORTANT
• In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse
approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the
mark, rating as marked on plug.
• Always replace the fuse cover. Never use plugs with
the fuse cover omitted.
• If the available electrical outlet is not suitable for the
plug supplied with this equipment, you should
contact your authorized Brother dealer to obtain the
correct lead.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC)
Supplier’s Declaration of
Conformity (For U.S.A.
Only)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the authorized Brother dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operated
in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Important
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very
low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply
without maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE).
Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation
200 Crossing Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911
USA
TEL : (908) 704-1700
declares that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Brother Sewing Machine
XJ1
4
For Users in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt
RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102
of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment
has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply
without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
For Users in Mexico
The operation of this equipment is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause
harmful interference, and
(2) this equipment or device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Declaration of Conformity
(Europe and Turkey only)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1 Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that this product is in
conformity with the essential requirements of all relevant
directives and regulations applied within the European
Community.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) can be downloaded
from Brother Solutions Center.
Visit http://s.brother/cpeaa/
and:
click “Manuals”
select your model
click “Declaration of Conformity”
click “Download”
Your Declaration will be downloaded as a PDF file.
Declaration of Conformity
for RE Directive 2014/53/
EU (CENELEC and Turkey
only)
(Applicable to models with
radio interfaces)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1 Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that these products are in
conformity with the provisions of the RE Directive 2014/53/
EU. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be
downloaded by following the instructions in the Declaration
of Conformity (Europe and Turkey only) section.
Wireless LAN (Models with
Wireless LAN function
only)
This machine supports wireless interface.
Frequency band(s): 2400-2483.5 MHz
Maximum radio-frequency power transmitted in the
frequency band(s): Less than 20 dBm(e.i.r.p)
For Users in Norway
This subsection does not apply for the geographical area
within a radius of 20 km from the centre of Ny-Alesund on
Svalbard.
Dette underavsnittet gjelder ikke for det geografiske området
innenfor en radius av 20 km fra sentrum av Ny-Ålesund på
Svalbard.
For Users in Thailand
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC
technical requirement.
5
Laser Notices (For U.S.A.
only)
Laser Safety
This sewing machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the
Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This
means that the sewing machine does not produce hazardous
laser radiation.
IEC 60825-1 Specification
This machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC
60825-1:2007 and IEC 60825-1:2014 specifications.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this
machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the
machine contains 6-milliwatt, 630-640nanometer
wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 28-40
degree at perpendicular divergence angle, InGaAlP laser
diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling
or altering this machine.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any
possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
FDA Regulations
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured on and after
August 2, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products
marketed in the United States. The label shown on the back of
the sewing machine indicates compliance with the FDA
regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed
in the United States.
Laser Notices (For
countries except U.S.A.)
IEC 60825-1 Specification
This machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC
60825-1:2007 and IEC 60825-1:2014 specifications.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this
machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the
machine contains 6-milliwatt, 630-640nanometer
wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 28-40
degree at perpendicular divergence angle, InGaAlP laser
diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling
or altering this machine.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any
possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Brother Industries, Ltd.
15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561,
JAPAN
This product complies with FDA performance standards
for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser
Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or the
performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION
• This sewing machine has a Class 3B Laser
Diode in the Laser Unit. The Laser Unit should
not be opened under any circumstances.
• Use of controls, adjustments or the
performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
6
Terms of Use
IMPORTANT-PLEASE READ
CAREFULLY:
This Terms of Use (“Agreement”) is a legal agreement
between Brother Industries, Ltd. (“Company”) and you that
governs your use of any Software, installed on or made
available by Company for use with sewing or craft products
(“Company Product”). The term of “Software” means any and
all contents data, design data, data format, firmware of
Company Product, and PC application or mobile device
application.
By using the Software and Company Product, you shall be
deemed to have agreed to be bound by the terms of this
Agreement. If you do not agree to the terms of this Agreement,
Company is unwilling to license the Software and you are not
allowed to use the Software. Amendments and supplements to
this Agreement may be attached to the Software.
An individual who accepts this Agreement on behalf of an
entity represents to Company that he or she has the legal right
to enter into a binding legal agreement for that entity.
Terms and Conditions
1 Grant of License.
1.1 Subject to this Agreement, Company hereby
grants you a personal, non-exclusive, non-
transferable and revocable license to use the
Software only within the Company Product.
1.2 Your right to use of the Software is licensed and
not sold, and solely for your use subject to this
Agreement. Company or its suppliers retains all
right, title, and interest relating to Software,
including without limitation all intellectual
property rights relating thereto.
2 Restrictions
2.1 Except as expressly set out in this Agreement or
as required by any local law, you shall
undertake:
2.1.1 not to disassemble, de-compile, reverse
engineer, translate or otherwise attempt
to learn the source code of the Software
(including the data or contents created
by using the Company Product or
contents editing application software;
hereinafter the same shall apply in this
Clause 2.);
2.1.2 not to create derivative works based on
the whole or any part of the Software;
2.1.3 not to distribute, provide or make
available the Software in any form, in
whole or in part to any person without
prior written consent from Company;
2.1.4 not to copy the Software, except where
such copying is incidental to normal
use of the Software with Company
Product or where it is necessary for the
purpose of back-up or operational
security;
2.1.5 not to transfer, rent, lease, sub-license,
loan, translate, merge, adapt, vary, alter
or modify, the whole or any part of the
Software nor permit the Software or any
part of it to be combined with, or
become incorporated in, any other
programs;
2.1.6 to include Company’s copyright notice
and this Agreement on all entire and
partial copies of the Software; and
2.1.7 not to use the Software for any purpose
(including, but not limited to, use with
unauthorized sewing/craft products or
software) other than as provided under
Clause 1 of this Agreement.
3No warranty
TO THE EXTENT PERMISSIBLE BY
APPLICABLE LAW, THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED TO YOU “AS IS” WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
KIND, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. COMPANY
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT AND/OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
4 Limitation of liability
4.1 COMPANY SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU,
ITS END-USERS OR ANY OTHER ENTITY FOR
ANY LOSS OF PROFITS OR INCOME OR
SAVINGS, LOSS OF DATA, INTERRUPTION
OF USE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INDIRECT DAMAGES INCURRED BY SUCH
PARTY (WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN
CONTRACT OR TORT), EVEN IF COMPANY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF OR
RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE, SUPPORT
SERVICE OR THIS AGREEMENT. THESE
LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY
APPLICABLE LAW NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF
ANY LIMITED REMEDY.
4.2 NOTWITHSTANDING THE CLAUSE 3 OR 4.1
HEREOF, THIS AGREEMENT DOES NOT
PURPORT TO EXCLUDE OR RESTRICT
COMPANY’S LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR
PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM
NEGLIGENCE OR LIMIT THE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER.
5Termination
5.1 Company shall have the right to terminate this
Agreement at any time by providing a written
notice to you if you commit a material breach
of any terms of this Agreement and fail to
immediately rectify such breach upon
Company’s request.
5.2 Upon termination for any reason all rights
granted to you under this Agreement shall
cease, you shall cease all activities authorized
by this Agreement and you shall immediately
delete or remove the Software from all
computer equipment in your possession and
delete or destroy all copies of the Software or
its derivative works in your possession. In
addition to the above, you shall delete contents
7
or design data created by you from the
Company Product in your possession.
6 Miscellaneous terms
6.1 You shall not export or re-export the Software
or any copy or adaptation thereof in violation
of any applicable laws or regulations.
6.2 You shall not assign all or any part of this
Agreement to any third party or any interest
therein, without prior written consent of
Company. A change of control or
reorganization of you pursuant to a merger,
sale of assets or stock shall be deemed to be an
assignment under this Agreement.
6.3 You agree that a breach of this Agreement will
cause irreparable injury to Company for which
monetary damages would not be an adequate
remedy and Company shall be entitled to seek
equitable relief in addition to any remedies it
may have hereunder or at law without a bond,
other security, or proof of damages.
6.4 If any provisions of this Agreement shall be
declared or determined as void or
unenforceable by a court of competent
jurisdiction, such provisions shall be severable
and independent from the other provisions of
this Agreement and the validity of the other
provisions and of the entire Agreement shall
not be affected thereby.
6.5 This Agreement, together with all exhibits or
other attachments referenced herein,
constitutes the entire agreement between the
parties on the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes all proposals, oral and written,
between the parties on this subject.
6.6 If Company fails to insist that you perform any
of your obligations under this Agreement, or if
Company does not enforce any rights against
you, or if Company delay in doing so, that will
not mean that Company have waived any
rights against you and will not mean that you
do not have to comply with those obligations.
If Company does waive a default by you,
Company will only do so in writing, and that
will not mean that Company will automatically
waive any later default by you.
6.7 The laws of the state or country where you live
(or, if a business, where your principal place of
business is located) govern all claims and
disputes concerning the Software or this
Agreement.
Secure Digital (SD) Card is a registered trademark or a
trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
CompactFlash is a registered trademark or a trademark of
Sandisk Corporation.
Memory Stick is a registered trademark or a trademark of
Sony Corporation.
SmartMedia is a registered trademark or a trademark of
Toshiba Corporation.
MultiMediaCard (MMC) is a registered trademark or a
trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
xD-Picture Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of
Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
WPA™ and WPA2™ are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a
Software License Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on
Brother products, related documents and any other materials are all
trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.
This product includes open-source software.
To see the open source licensing remarks, please go to the
manual download section on your model’s home page of
Brother Solutions Center at “ http://s.brother/cpeaa/
”.
TRADEMARKS
OPEN SOURCE LICENSING
REMARKS
CONTENTS
8
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Getting Ready 11
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS.............................. 12
Included Accessories............................................................ 15
Accessories that are Included in Some Countries or
regions ................................................................................. 18
Options................................................................................ 18
Using the Multi-Purpose Screwdriver (Included with Some
Models)................................................................................ 20
Using the Spool Stand (Included with Some Models)............ 20
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF................... 22
LCD SCREEN ...................................................... 23
Using the Machine Settings Key ........................................... 27
Using the Machine Help ...................................................... 31
Using the Stitch Pattern Explanation Function ...................... 32
WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION
FUNCTIONS....................................................... 33
Enabling a Wireless Network Connection............................. 33
Setting Up the Wireless Network Connection....................... 33
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE
MACHINE........................................................... 35
Using a USB Mouse (Sold Separately)................................... 35
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN.............. 36
Winding the Bobbin ............................................................. 36
Setting the Bobbin ................................................................ 40
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread .............................................. 41
UPPER THREADING........................................... 42
Upper Threading.................................................................. 42
Using the Twin Needle Mode............................................... 45
Using the Spool Stand .......................................................... 46
CHANGING THE NEEDLE.................................. 48
FABRIC/THREAD/NEEDLE COMBINATIONS .... 49
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT ...................... 50
Replacing the Presser Foot.................................................... 50
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included Adapter........... 50
Using the Dual Feed Foot..................................................... 51
Chapter 2 Sewing Basics 55
SEWING ............................................................. 56
Stitch Types.......................................................................... 56
Basic Sewing........................................................................ 56
Combining Stitch Patterns .................................................... 58
Sewing Reverse Stitches/Reinforcement Stitches................... 59
Automatic Reverse/Reinforcement Stitching ......................... 60
Automatic Presser Foot Lowering Function and Thread
Cutting Function................................................................... 61
STITCH SETTINGS.............................................. 62
Setting the Stitch Width/Stitch Length/“L/R Shift” .................. 62
Setting the Thread Tension ................................................... 62
Saving Your Stitch Settings ................................................... 63
USEFUL FUNCTIONS......................................... 64
Automatic Thread Cutting .................................................... 64
Adjusting the Needle Drop Point with the Guideline
Marker ................................................................................. 64
Pivoting................................................................................ 65
Using the Knee Lifter............................................................ 66
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure)............................................................................... 67
Needle Position - Stitch Placement....................................... 67
Using the Straight Stitch Needle Plate and the Straight
Stitch Foot............................................................................ 67
USEFUL SEWING TIPS ....................................... 69
Sewing Tips.......................................................................... 69
Sewing Various Fabrics ........................................................ 69
Sewing Decorative Stitch Patterns ........................................ 70
Chapter 3 Various Stitches 71
UTILITY STITCHES............................................. 72
Straight Stitches ................................................................... 72
Zigzag Stitches..................................................................... 76
Overcasting ......................................................................... 76
Quilting............................................................................... 77
Blind Hem Stitches .............................................................. 83
Shell Tuck Stitches............................................................... 85
Scallop Stitches.................................................................... 85
Smocking Stitches................................................................ 85
Fagoting............................................................................... 86
Attaching Tape or Elastic ..................................................... 86
Heirloom............................................................................. 87
One-Step Buttonholes.......................................................... 88
Four-Step Buttonholes.......................................................... 90
Bar Tacks............................................................................. 92
Button Sewing ..................................................................... 93
Eyelet................................................................................... 94
Multi-Directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag
Stitch) .................................................................................. 94
Zipper Insertion ................................................................... 95
MAKING ADJUSTMENTS .................................. 97
MAKING STEP STITCH PATTERNS (FOR 7MM
SATIN STITCH PATTERNS ONLY) ..................... 98
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ................... 99
Saving Stitch Patterns........................................................... 99
Retrieving Stitch Patterns ..................................................... 99
MY CUSTOM STITCH...................................... 100
Retrieving Saved Stitch Patterns ......................................... 103
Chapter 4 Basic Embroidery 105
BEFORE EMBROIDERING................................ 106
Embroidery Step by Step .................................................... 106
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer ........... 106
About the Embroidery Unit ................................................ 107
SELECTING PATTERNS .................................... 108
Selecting Embroidery Patterns............................................ 109
Selecting Character Patterns............................................... 110
Selecting Frame Patterns.................................................... 112
Combining Patterns ........................................................... 112
EDITING PATTERNS ........................................ 114
Previewing the Pattern....................................................... 116
Changing the Size and the Density of the Pattern............... 117
Creating Repeated Patterns ................................................ 117
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly ................................. 120
EDITING COLORS........................................... 122
Changing the Thread Color................................................ 122
Finding New Color Schemes with the Color Shuffling
Function ............................................................................ 123
Thread Color Sorting.......................................................... 124
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN............ 125
PREPARING THE FABRIC ................................ 127
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric.......... 127
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame..................... 128
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME ........ 130
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION ....... 131
Checking the Needle Drop Point with the Embroidery
Foot “W+” with LED Pointer.............................................. 131
Displaying a Background Image ........................................ 132
Checking the Pattern Position ............................................ 133
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN.......................... 134
Embroidering Attractive Finishes........................................ 134
Embroidering Patterns........................................................ 135
Using Appliqués ................................................................ 136
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY
PROCESS ........................................................... 138
CONTENTS
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Runs out of Thread
During Embroidering ......................................................... 138
Resuming Embroidery after Turning off the Power.............. 138
Chapter 5 Advanced Embroidery 139
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS ....... 140
Basting Embroidery ............................................................ 140
Creating an Appliqué Piece................................................ 140
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS ......... 143
Adjusting Thread Tension .................................................. 143
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin Case (with No Color on
the Screw).......................................................................... 145
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function (End Color
Trim).................................................................................. 146
Using the Thread Trimming Function (Jump Stitch Trim) .... 146
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed ........................................ 147
Changing the Thread Color Display ................................... 147
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle................................... 147
Embroidering Linked Characters ........................................ 148
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.................. 150
Saving Embroidery Patterns................................................ 150
Retrieving Embroidery Patterns .......................................... 150
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS ........................ 151
Using a Frame Pattern To Make an Appliqué ..................... 151
Embroidering Split Embroidery Patterns ............................. 152
Chapter 6 My Design Center 155
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER .......................... 156
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN ......................... 156
Before Creating Designs..................................................... 158
Drawing Lines.................................................................... 158
Drawing Regions ............................................................... 159
Using the Stamp Key.......................................................... 160
Using the Erase Key ........................................................... 161
Using the Select Key .......................................................... 161
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN.............................. 162
Specifying Individual Stitch Settings ................................... 162
Specifying Global Stitch Settings........................................ 163
Loading the Background Image.......................................... 164
LINE CONVERSION ......................................... 165
Create a Pattern with Line Conversion ............................... 165
ILLUSTRATION CONVERSION........................ 167
Create a Pattern with Illustration Conversion...................... 167
STIPPLING ....................................................... 169
Basic Stippling with My Design Center .............................. 169
Decorative Stitching around a Pattern in Embroidery
(a Quilting Function).......................................................... 171
Chapter 7 Appendix 175
CARE AND MAINTENANCE............................. 176
Restrictions on Oiling ........................................................ 176
Precautions on Storing the Machine................................... 176
Cleaning the Race ............................................................. 176
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area ..................... 177
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN................................ 177
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning........................................... 177
TROUBLESHOOTING...................................... 178
Frequent Troubleshooting Topics ....................................... 178
Upper Thread is Too Tight ................................................. 178
Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric ........................... 179
Incorrect Thread Tension ................................................... 179
Fabric is Caught in the Machine and Cannot Be
Removed ........................................................................... 180
Untangling Thread from beneath the Bobbin Winder
Seat.................................................................................... 182
List of Symptoms................................................................ 182
ERROR MESSAGES ........................................... 187
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 192
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S
SOFTWARE ...................................................... 194
STITCH SETTING CHART ................................ 194
INDEX.............................................................. 200
CONTENTS
10
Chapter 1
Getting Ready
Be sure to install the latest software.
Refer to “UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE” on page 194.
http://s.brother/cpeaa/
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
12
■ Main Parts
1 Top cover
2 Pretension disk (page 37)
3 Thread guide for bobbin winding (page 37)
4 Spool pin (page 42)
5 Spool cap (page 36)
6 Supplemental spool pin (page 36)
7 Bobbin winder (page 36)
8 LCD (liquid crystal display) (page 23)
9 Speaker
0 Knee lifter (page 66)
A Knee lifter slot (page 66)
B Operation buttons and sewing speed controller
(page 13)
C Flat bed attachment with accessory compartment
(page 14)
D Thread cutter (page 43)
E Thread guide plate (page 39)
F Connector for the presser foot (page 52, page 107)
G Handle
Carry the machine by its handle when transporting the
machine.
H Presser foot lever
You cannot use the presser foot lever after the presser foot has
been raised using (Presser foot lifter button).
I Air vent
The air vent allows the air surrounding the motor to circulate.
Do not cover the air vent while the machine is being used.
J Main power switch (page 22)
K Foot controller (page 58)
L Power cord receptacle (page 22)
M Foot controller jack (page 58)
N USB port for mouse (page 35)
O USB port
P Handwheel
Turn the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to raise and
lower the needle.
Q Embroidery unit (page 107)
■ Needle and Presser Foot Section
1 Buttonhole lever (page 89)
2 Presser foot holder screw (page 50, page 106)
3 Presser foot holder (page 50)
4 Presser foot locking pin (page 69)
5 Presser foot
The presser foot consistently applies pressure to the fabric as
sewing takes place. Attach the appropriate presser foot for the
selected stitch.
6 Feed dogs
The feed dogs feed the fabric in the sewing direction.
7 Bobbin cover (page 40)
8 Needle plate cover (page 40)
9 Needle plate (page 72)
0 Needle bar thread guide (page 43)
A Needle clamp screw (page 48)
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
Getting Ready
13
1
Measurements on the needle plate, bobbin cover (with
mark) and needle plate cover
The measurements on the bobbin cover are references
for stitch patterns with a middle (center) needle
position. The measurements on the needle plate and the
needle plate cover are references for stitches with a left
needle position.
1 For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
2 For stitches with a left needle position
3 Left needle position on the needle plate <inch>
4 Left needle position on the needle plate <cm>
5 Middle (center) needle position on the bobbin cover
(with mark) <inch>
6 Left needle position on the needle plate cover <inch>
■ Operation Buttons
1 “Start/Stop” button
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start or stop the machine. The
button changes color according to the machine’s operation
mode.
2 Reverse stitch button
Press the reverse button to sew reverse or reinforcement
stitches depending on the selected stitch pattern. (page 59)
3 Reinforcement stitch button
Press the reinforcement button to sew a single stitch
repeatedly and tie-off. (page 59)
For character/decorative stitches, press this button to end with
a full stitch instead of at a mid-point.
The LED beside the button automatically lights up while the
stitch is being sewn and goes off when sewing is finished.
4 Needle position button
Press the needle position button to raise or lower the needle
position. Pressing the button twice sews a single stitch.
5 Thread cutter button
Press the thread cutter button after sewing to automatically
trim the excess thread.
6 Presser foot lifter button
Press the presser foot lifter button to lower the presser foot and
apply pressure to the fabric. Press this button again to raise the
presser foot.
7 Sewing Speed controller
Use the sewing speed controller to adjust the sewing speed.
Move the slide to the left to sew at slower speeds. Move the
slide to the right to sew at higher speeds.
8 Automatic threading button
Use the automatic threading button to automatically thread the
needle.
Green: The machine is ready or is operating.
Red: The machine is not ready.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
14
■ Using the Flat Bed Attachment
Pull the top of the flat bed attachment to open the
accessory compartment.
1 Presser foot storage tray
2 Presser foot storage space of the flat bed attachment
■ Using the Accessory Case (Included with Some
Models)
Opening the accessory case
Fully slide the bar on each side of the accessory case to
the unlocked position, and then lift off the lid to open the
case.
The case can only be opened or locked correctly if both
bars are slid in the same direction.
1 Bars
Closing the accessory case
a
Fully slide the bar on each side of the accessory case
lid to the unlocked position.
b
Place the lid on top of the case so that the notches in
the lid align with the tabs on the case, and then slide
the bar on each side back to the locked position.
■ Storing Bobbin Clips
Bobbin clips can be stored inside of the accessory case
cover.
a
b
a
Memo
• Placing bobbin clips on bobbins helps prevent the
thread from unwinding from the bobbin. In
addition, snapping bobbin clips together allows the
bobbins to be conveniently stored and prevents
them from rolling around if they are dropped.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
Getting Ready
15
1
Included Accessories
After opening the box, check that the following
accessories are included. If any item is missing or
damaged, contact your authorized Brother dealer.
Part Name
Part Code
Zigzag foot “J” (on machine)
XF3022-001
Monogramming foot “N”
X53840-351
Overcasting foot “G”
XC3098-051
Zipper foot “I”
X59370-051
Buttonhole foot “A”
X57789-351
Blind stitch foot “R”
X56409-051
Button fitting foot “M”
130489-001
Dual feed foot
SA196 (U.S.A.) / SA196C (Canada)
DF1: XF4166-001 (Europe)
DF1CN: 115C05E601C (China)
DF1AP: XF6843-001 (other areas)
Straight stitch foot
SA167 (Americas)
F042N: XG6615-001 (Europe)
F042: XC1973-052 (other areas)
J
N
G
I
A
R
M
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
XF4873-001
Embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer
SA197 (U.S.A.) / SA197C (Canada)
FLED1: XF4168-001 (Europe)
FLED1AP: 115C05E700W (other areas)
1/4 quilting foot with guide
SA185 (Americas)
F057: XC7416-252 / 115C05E0005 (Europe)
F057: 115C05E7005 (other areas)
Adapter
SA131 (Americas)
F010N: XG2001-001 / 115Z05E0004 (Europe)
F010AP: 115Z05E7004 (other areas)
Screw (small)
XA4813-051
Needle set
75/11 2 needles
90/14 2 needles
90/14 2 needles: Ball point needle (gold
colored)
XE4962-001
Twin needle
2.0/11 needle
XE4963-001
Ball point needle set
75/11 2 needles:
Ball point needle for embroidery
XD0705-151
Bobbin × 10 (One bobbin is in machine.)
SA156 (Americas)
SFB: XA5539-151 / 115J05E0001 (Europe)
SFB: 115J05E7001 (other areas)
Part Name
Part Code
O
O
W+
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
16
Seam ripper
XF4967-001
Scissors
XF2052-001
Cleaning brush
X59476-051
Eyelet punch
XZ5051-001
Screwdriver (small)
X55468-051
Screwdriver (large)
XC4237-021
Disc-shaped screwdriver
XC1074-051
Spool cap (small)
130013-154
Spool cap (medium) × 2 (One spool cap is on
machine.)
X55260-153
Spool cap (large)
130012-054
Part Name
Part Code
Thread spool insert (mini king thread spool)
XA5752-121
Bobbin clip × 10
XE3060-001
Spool felt (on machine)
X57045-051
Spool net × 2
XA5523-050
Embroidery needle plate cover
XE5131-001
Touch pen (stylus)
XA9940-051
Knee lifter
XA6941-052
Foot controller
XD0501-151 (Europe)
XC8816-051 (other areas)
Standard bobbin case (green marking on the
screw) (on machine)
XE5342-101
Alternate bobbin case (no color on the screw)
XC8167-651
Part Name
Part Code
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
Getting Ready
17
1
Straight stitch needle plate
XF3076-001
Cord guide bobbin cover (with single hole)
XE8991-101
Bobbin cover (with mark)
XF0750-101
Bobbin cover (on machine)
XE8992-101
Embroidery frame with decal set
H 36 cm × W 24 cm
(H 14 inches × W 9-1/2 inches)
SA449S (Americas)
EF95S: XH4465-001 /115D05E0017 (Europe)
EF95SAP: 115D05E7017 (other areas)
Embroidery frame with decal set
H 18 cm × W 13 cm
(H 7 inches × W 5 inches)
SA439S (Americas)
EF75S: XH4464-001 / 115D05E0016 (Europe)
EF75SAP: 115D05E7016 (other areas)
Embroidery positioning sticker sheets × 4
SAEPS2 (U.S.A.) / SAEPS2C (Canada)
EPS2: XG6749-001 / 115Z05E000E (Europe)
EPS2CN: 115Z05E600E (China)
EPS2: XF0763-001 (other areas)
Lens calibration sheet
XH4336-001
Embroidery bobbin thread (#60, white)
SA-EBT (Americas)
EBT-CEN: X81164-001 / 115G05E0001
(Europe)
EBT-CEN: 115G05E7001 (other areas)
Stabilizer material
SA519 (Americas)
BM3: XG6683-001 / 115Z05E0007 (Europe)
BM3CN: 115Z05E6007 (China)
BM3: XE0806-001 (other areas)
Part Name
Part Code
Grid sheet set
SA507 (Americas)
GS3: 115Z05E000N (Europe)
GS3: 115Z05E700N (other areas)
Chalk pencil
XE8568-001
Operation Manual
This manual
Quick Reference Guide
XH3872-001 (Americas)
XH3949-001 (Europe)
XH3874-001 (other areas)
Memo
• (For U.S.A. only)
Foot controller: Model T
This foot controller can be used on the machine
with product code 882-W70. The product code is
mentioned on the machine rating plate.
• The presser foot holder screw is available through
your authorized Brother dealer (Part code XA5904-
051).
• Please visit “ http://s.brother/cpeaa/
” to download
documents.
Part Name
Part Code
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
18
Accessories that are Included in Some
Countries or regions
If these accessories are not included with your
machine, these are available as optional accessories.
Options
The following are available as optional accessories to
be purchased separately from your authorized Brother
dealer.
* These embroidery frames can be used for general
embroidery but cannot be used with the application (My
Design Snap).
Part Name
Part Code
Bobbin center pin and instruction sheet
XF5048-001
Multi-purpose screwdriver
SAMDRIVER1 (U.S.A.) / SAMDRIVER1C
(Canada)
MDRIVER1: XG1298-001 / 115Z05E0003
(Europe)
MDRIVER1AP: 115Z05E7003 (other areas)
Accessory case
XH4063-001
Accessory bag
XC4487-021
Embroidery frame with decal set
H 24 cm × W 24 cm
(H 9-1/2 inches × W 9-1/2 inches)
SA450S (Americas)
EF97S: XH4466-001 /115D05E0018 (Europe)
EF97SAP: 115D05E7018 (other areas)
Embroidery frame with decal set
H 10 cm × W 10 cm
(H 4 inches × W 4 inches)
SA438S (Americas)
EF74S: XH4463-001/ 115D05E0015 (Europe)
EF74SAP: 115D05E7015 (other areas)
Spool stand
SA562 (U.S.A.) / SA562C (Canada)
TS6: XF4180-001 (Europe)
TS6: 115L05E7002 (other areas)
Free motion quilting foot “C”
XF4737-001
Free motion echo quilting foot “E”
XE0766-001
C
E
E
Vertical spool pin
XC8619-052
Part Name
Part Code
Multi-function foot controller
SAMFFC (U.S.A.) / SAMFFCC (Canada)
MFFC1: XG6777-001 (Europe)
MFFC1CN: 115F05E6002 (China)
MFFC1OC: 115F05E7002 (other areas)
*
Embroidery frame set
H 30 cm × W 20 cm
(H 12 inches × W 8 inches)
SA447 (Americas)
EF92: XG6717-001 (Europe)
EF92: 115D05E700Z (other areas)
*
Embroidery frame set
H 20 cm × W 20 cm
(H 8 inches × W 8 inches)
SA446 (U.S.A.) / SA446C (Canada)
EF91: XG6715-001 (Europe)
EF91: XE5068-101 (other areas)
*
Embroidery frame set
H 15 cm × W 15 cm
(H 6 inches × W 6 inches)
SA448 (U.S.A.) / SA448C (Canada)
SEF150: XG6761-001 (Europe)
SFE150: 115D05E700E (other areas)
*
Border embroidery frame
H 30 cm × W 10 cm
(H 12 inches × W 4 inches)
SABF6200D1 (U.S.A.) / SABF6200D1C
(Canada)
BF3: XG6763-001 (Europe)
BF3: XF4170-001/115D05E700N (other areas)
10 spool stand
SA561 (U.S.A.) / SA561C (Canada)
TS5: XG6765-001 (Europe)
TS5: 115L05E7003 (other areas)
Part Name
Part Code
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
Getting Ready
19
1
Wide table
SAWT6200D (U.S.A.) / SAWT6200DC (Canada)
WT10: XG6767-001 (Europe)
WT10: XF4184-001 (other areas)
Embroidery bobbin thread (#60, black)
SAEBT999 (Americas)
EBT-CEBN: XG6643-001 (Europe)
EBT-CEBN: XC5520-001 (other areas)
Stabilizer material
SA519 (Americas)
BM3: XG6683-001 / 115Z05E0007 (Europe)
BM3CN: 115Z05E6007 (China)
BM3: XE0806-001 (other areas)
Water soluble stabilizer
SA520 (Americas)
BM5: XG6681-001 (Europe)
BM5CN: 115Z05E600J (China)
BM5: XE0615-001 (other areas)
Embroidery foot “W”
XF4012-001
Seam guide
SA538 (Americas)
SG1: XC8483-052 (Europe)
SG1: 115Z05E7002 (other areas)
Walking foot
SA140 (Americas)
F033N: XG6623-001 (Europe)
F033CN: 115C05E6015 (China)
F033N: 115C05E7015 (other areas)
Quilting guide
SA132 (Americas)
F016N: XC2215-052(Europe)
F016CN: 115Z05E6009 (China)
F016N: 115Z05E7001 (other areas)
Side cutter foot
SA177 (Americas)
F054: XC3879-152 (Europe)
F054CN: 115C05E6008 (China)
F054: 115C05E7008 (other areas)
Part Name
Part Code
W
Free-motion quilting foot
SA129 (Americas)
F005N: XC1948-052 (Europe)
F005N: 115C05E7002 (other areas)
Circular attachment
SACIRC1 (U.S.A.) / SACIRC1C (Canada)
CCIRC1: XG6705-001 (Europe)
CIRC1CN: 115Y05E6003 (China)
CIRC1: 115Y05E7003 (other areas)
Stitch in the ditch foot
SA191 (Americas)
F065: XF2339-001 (Europe)
F065CN: 115C05E600C (China)
F065: 115C05E700C (other areas)
Open toe for dual feed foot
SA195 (Americas)
XG6773-001 (Europe)
F070CN: 115C05E6011 (China)
F070: 115C05E7011 (other areas)
Stitch in the ditch dual feed foot
SA204 (U.S.A.) / SA204C (Canada)
F075: XG3155-001 (Europe)
F075AP: 115C05E700Y (other areas)
1/4 inch guide dual feed foot
SA205 (U.S.A.) / SA205C (Canada)
F076: XG4868-001 (Europe)
F076AP: 115C05E701D (other areas)
Couching foot
SA199V (U.S.A.) / SA199VC (Canada)
F073: XF8185-001 (Europe)
F073AP: XF8188-001 (other areas)
Narrow Zipper Foot “I+”
SA208 (U.S.A.) / SA208C (Canada)
F079: 115C05E002D (Europe)
F079CN: 115C05E602D (China)
F079AP: 115C05E702D (other areas)
Concealed Zipper Foot “K”
SA102 (U.S.A.) / SA102C (Canada)
F080: 115C05E002E (Europe)
F080AP: 115C05E702E (other areas)
USB mouse
XE5334-101
Part Name
Part Code
I+
K
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
20
Using the Multi-Purpose Screwdriver
(Included with Some Models)
Since the screwdriver can be changed to three different
positions, it can be extremely useful for the various
machine preparations.
Using the Spool Stand (Included with Some
Models)
The included spool stand is useful when using thread
spools with a large diameter (cross-wound thread). The
spool stand can hold two spools of thread.
■ How to Assemble the Spool Stand
a
Fully extend the telescopic thread guide shaft, and then
rotate the shaft until the two internal stoppers click
into place.
Memo
• To obtain optional accessories or parts, contact
your authorized Brother dealer or visit our site
“ http://s.brother/cpeaa/ ”.
• All specifications are correct at the time of printing.
Please be aware that some specifications may
change without notice.
• A variety of feet are available to enable different
types of stitching and finishes. Visit your nearest
authorized Brother dealer or our site “ http://
s.brother/cpeaa/ ” for a complete listing of optional
accessories available for your machine.
• Always use accessories recommended for this
machine.
Position “1” You can install/remove the presser foot holder,
needle clamp screw.
Position “2” You can install/remove the needle plate.
Position “3” The multi-purpose screwdriver can be
positioned over the screw on the embroidery
frame to tighten the screw after hooping the
fabric or when removing the fabric.
123
456
789
No. Part Name Part Code
1 Telescopic thread guide XE0776-001
2 Spool support XE4637-001
3 Spool pin × 2 XA6313-051
4 Screw and washer XC7568-051
5 Spool cap (XL) × 2 XE0779-001
6 Spool holder × 2 XA0679-050
7 Spool cap base × 2 XE0780-001
8 Spool felt × 2 XC7134-051
9 Ring × 4 026030-136
CAUTION
• Do not lift the handle of the machine while the
spool stand is installed.
• Do not push or pull the telescopic thread
guide or spool pins with extreme force,
otherwise damage may result.
• Do not place any object other than spools of
thread on the spool support.
• Do not try to wind thread on the bobbin while
sewing using the spool stand.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
Getting Ready
21
1
b
Insert the telescopic thread guide into the round hole
at the center of the spool support, and then use a
screwdriver to securely tighten the screw from the
reverse side.
1 Screw
c
Firmly insert the two spool pins into the two holes in
the spool support.
d
Open the upper cover of the machine, and then pull
the upper cover up to remove it from the machine.
e
Insert the spool stand onto the notches of the machine.
■ How To Remove
a
Pull the spool stand up to remove it from the machine.
b
Attach the upper cover to the machine.
Note
• Make sure that the stoppers on the telescopic
thread guide shaft are firmly in place and that the
thread guide openings are directly above the two
holes for spool pins in the spool support. In
addition, check that the shaft is securely tightened
in the spool support.
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
22
a
Insert the power supply cord into the power cord
receptacle, then insert the plug into a wall outlet.
1 Main power switch
2 Power supply cord
b
Turn the main power switch to “I” to turn on the
machine.
c
When the machine is turned on, the opening movie is
played. Press anywhere on the screen.
d
Turn the main power switch to “O” to turn off the
machine.
■ Setting Your Machine for the First Time
When you first turn on the machine, set the language and
time/date to your language and local time/date.
a
Press and to set your local language and then
press .
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
WARNING
• Use only regular household electricity for the
power source. Using other power sources may
result in fire, electric shock, or damage to the
machine.
• Make sure that the plugs on the power cord
are firmly inserted into the electrical outlet
and the power cord receptacle on the
machine. Otherwise, a fire or electric shock
may result.
• Do not insert the plug on the power cord into
an electrical outlet that is in poor condition.
• Turn the main power to OFF and remove the
plug in the following circumstances:
• When you are away from the machine
• After using the machine
• When the power fails during use
• When the machine does not operate correctly
due to a bad connection or a disconnection
• During electrical storms
CAUTION
• Use only the power cord included with this
machine.
• Do not use extension cords or multi-plug
adapters with many other appliances plugged
in to them. Fire or electric shock may result.
• Do not touch the plug with wet hands. Electric
shock may result.
• When unplugging the machine, always turn
the main power to OFF first. Always grasp the
plug to remove it from the outlet. Pulling on
the cord may damage the cord, or lead to fire
or electric shock.
• Do not allow the power cord to be cut,
damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled,
twisted, or bundled. Do not place heavy
objects on the cord. Do not subject the cord to
heat. These things may damage the cord, or
cause fire or electric shock. If the cord or plug
is damaged, take the machine to your
authorized Brother dealer for repairs before
continuing use.
• Unplug the power cord if the machine is not to
be used for a long period of time. Otherwise, a
fire may result.
•(For U.S.A only)
This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade
wider than the other). To reduce the risk of
electrical shock, this plug is intended to fit in a
polarized electrical outlet only one way.
If the plug does not fit fully in the electrical
outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit,
contact a qualified electrician to install the
proper electrical outlet. Do not modify the
plug in any way.
Memo
• The light, LCD and the “Start/Stop” button light up
when the machine is turned on. The machine will
make a sound. This is not a malfunction.
a
b
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
23
1
b
The message screen, confirming if you want to set
time/date, appears. Press .
c
Press or to set time/date.
1 Select [ON] to display time/date on the screen.
2 Press or to select the date display format.
3 Set the year (YYYY), month (MM) and date (DD).
4 Select whether 24h or 12h setting will display.
5 Set the current time.
d
Press to set.
The clock starts from 0 second of the time you set.
Touch the LCD screen or a key with your finger or the
included touch pen to select a machine function.
■ Home Page Screen
Note
• The time/date you set may be cleared, if you don't
turn on the machine for an extended period of time.
LCD SCREEN
CAUTION
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the
touch pen (stylus) included with the machine.
Do not use a mechanical pencil, screwdriver
or any other hard or sharp object. In addition,
do not press the screen with extreme pressure.
Otherwise the screen may be damaged.
• All or part of the screen may sometimes
become darker or lighter due to changes in the
surrounding temperature or other changes in
the environment. This is not a sign of a
malfunction. If the screen is difficult to read,
adjust its brightness.
3
1
4
5
2
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
1 Select a utility stitch or character/
decorative stitch pattern.
56
Sewing key
2 Select an embroidery pattern.
Attach the embroidery unit.
108
Embroidery
key
3 Create an original embroidery
pattern.
156
My Design
Center key
4 Shows the machine’s signal
strength. Press this key to specify
the wireless settings.
29, 33
Wireless LAN
key
5 Change the needle stop position,
adjust the pattern or screen, and
change other machine settings.
27
Machine
settings key
6 See explanations on how to use
the machine. You can see the
tutorial videos and also MP4
movie files that you have saved on
USB media.
31
Machine help
key
7 Press this key before changing the
needle, the presser foot, etc. This
key locks all key and button
functions to prevent operation of
the machine. Press this key again
to unlock the settings.
40, 48,
50
Presser foot/
Needle
exchange key
8 Lock the screen. When the screen
is locked, can still sew, but cannot
change any of the screen
functions. Press this key again to
unlock the screen.
—
Screen lock
key
9 Return to the home page screen at
any time and select a different
mode ([Sewing], [Embroidery] or
[My Design Center]).
—
Home page
screen key
0 Set the time/date. 22
Time/Date key
2
3
1
0
4 5 6 7 8 9
LCD SCREEN
24
■ Utility Stitch Screen ■ Character/Decorative Stitch Screen
No. Display Name Explanation Page
1 Utility stitch key Select a straight stitch, zigzag stitch, buttonhole, blind hem stitch, or other
stitch (utility stitch) commonly used in garment making.
56
2 Character/Decorative
stitch key
Select character or decorative stitch patterns. 56
3 Needle position
setting display
Shows single or twin needle mode setting, and the needle stop position. 45, 65
4 Presser foot display Shows the presser foot code. Attach the presser foot indicated in this
display before sewing.
* The symbols for certain presser feet, such as zipper foot “I”, may not
appear in the screen.
50
5 Selected stitch
display
Shows the name and code number of the selected stitch. –
6 Stitch preview Shows a preview of the selected stitch. When shown at 100%, the stitch
appears in the screen at nearly its actual size.
–
7 Stitch pattern display
size
Shows the approximate size of the stitch pattern selected.
100%: Nearly the same size as the sewn stitch pattern
50%: 1/2 the size of the sewn stitch pattern
25%: 1/4 the size of the sewn stitch pattern
–
8 – Category Select the category of the stitch pattern you want to sew. 56
9
Page key
Press or , to move the pages of stitch selection screen, one page
at a time. You can scroll up and down the pages by touching the screen.
–
0 Stitch selection
screen
Press the key for the stitch pattern you want to sew. –
4
5
6
8
7
0 9
213
821
4
6
7
0
3
Single needle/down position Twin needle/down position
Single needle/up position Twin needle/up position
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
25
1
■ Key Functions
Note
• Some editing functions cannot be used with certain stitch patterns. Only the functions for the displayed keys are
available when a stitch pattern is selected.
• The machine default setting is highlighted.
No. Display Name Explanation Page
1 Image key Display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern.
Press to change the thread color in the image.
To display the enlarged image, press .
To view any part of the image that extends out of the viewable display area,
press / / / .
–
2 Free motion mode
key
Press this key to enter free motion sewing mode.
The presser foot is raised to an appropriate height and the feed dog is lowered
for free motion quilting.
80
3 Horizontal mirror
image key
Create a horizontal mirror image of the stitch pattern. –
4 Needle mode
selection key (single/
double)
Press this key to select twin needle mode. The sewing mode changes between
single needle mode and twin needle mode each time you press the key.
• If the key is light gray after selecting the stitch, the selected stitch
cannot be sewn in the twin needle mode.
45
5 Back to beginning key When sewing is stopped, press this key to return to the beginning of the stitch. –
6 Single/Repeat sewing
key
Select single stitches or continuous stitches. To finish a complete motif while
sewing the stitch pattern continuously, you can press this key while sewing.
The machine will automatically stop when the motif is finished.
98
7 Retrieve key Retrieve a saved stitch pattern. 63
8 Manual memory key Change the stitch pattern settings (zigzag width and stitch length, thread
tension, automatic thread cutting or automatic reinforcement stitching, etc.),
then save them by pressing this key. Five sets of settings can be saved for a
single stitch pattern.
63
9 Reset key Return the saved settings for the selected stitch pattern to their defaults. 63
0 Thread tension key Shows the automatic thread tension setting of the currently selected stitch
pattern. You can use and to change the thread tension settings.
62
3
7
8
9
0
D
C
1
2
5
4
6
AB
F
E
G
C
D
2
5
6
3
I
J
4
K
L
0AB
E
F
G
1
H
M
LCD SCREEN
26
A “L/R Shift” key
Press to shift the stitch pattern to the right or press to shift the stitch
pattern to the left. This feature is not available for all stitch patterns. Only those
applicable will be shifted.
62
B Stitch width and
stitch length key
Shows the zigzag width and stitch length settings of the currently selected
stitch pattern. You can use and to adjust the zigzag width and stitch
length settings.
62
C Guideline marker key Display the guideline marker along the sewing line. The guideline marker
makes it easier to align stitches with the fabric edge or other marker on the
fabric.
64
D Pivot key Turn on/off the pivot function. When the pivot function is selected, stopping the
machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the presser foot automatically. In
addition, when sewing is restarted, the presser foot is automatically lowered.
65
E Automatic thread
cutting key
Turn on this function to set the machine to automatically sew reinforcement
stitches (or reverse stitches, depending on the selected stitch pattern) at the
beginning and end of stitching and to trim the threads at the end of stitching.
64
F Automatic reverse/
reinforcement stitch
key
If you select this setting before sewing, the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on the
pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches).
60
G Thread color change
key
Change the thread color in the image. –
H Memory key Save stitch pattern combinations. 99
I Vertical mirror image
key
Create a vertical mirror image of the stitch pattern. –
J Size selection key Select the size of the stitch pattern (large, small). –
K Delete key Delete the selected stitch pattern. 59
L Some of the following keys will appear, depending on the selected stitch pattern.
Elongation key When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, you can choose from 5 automatic
length settings, without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch length
settings.
–
Thread density key When the satin stitch patterns are selected, you can change the thread density
of the stitch pattern.
: Low density : High density
–
Character spacing
key
Change the spacing of character stitch patterns. The setting is applied to all
entered characters.
–
M Add stitch pattern key Combine stitch patterns. 58
No. Display Name Explanation Page
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
27
1
Using the Machine Settings Key
Press to change the default machine settings
(needle stop position, embroidery speed, opening
display, etc.). To display the different settings screens,
press for “Sewing settings”, for “General
settings”, for “Embroidery settings” or for
“Wireless LAN settings”.
■ Sewing Settings
1 Select whether to use the sewing speed controller to
determine the zigzag width (page 79).
2 Make adjustments to character or decorative stitch
patterns (page 97).
3 Adjust the presser foot height. Select the height of the
presser foot when the presser foot is raised.
4 Adjust the presser foot pressure. The higher the number,
the greater the pressure will be. Set the pressure at [3]
for normal sewing.
5 Adjust the amount of fabric feeding of the dual feed foot
(page 53).
6 Select whether [1-01 Straight stitch (Left)] or [1-03
Straight stitch (Middle)] is the utility stitch that is
automatically selected when the machine is turned on.
7 Select whether utility stitches or quilting stitches
are displayed first on the stitch selection screen.
8 You can activate this setting after connecting the multi-
function foot controller (sold separately). (These settings
appear when the multi-function foot controller is
connected to the machine.)
9 Select the height of the presser foot when sewing is
stopped when the pivot setting is selected (page 65).
0 Select the height of the presser foot when the machine is
set to free motion sewing mode (page 80).
A When set to [ON], the thickness of the fabric is
automatically detected by an internal sensor while
sewing. (page 67)
B When set to [ON], reinforcement stitches are sewn at the
beginning and/or end of sewing for a reinforcement
stitch pattern, even when (Reverse stitch button) is
pressed (page 60).
C Adjust the guideline marker position and brightness
(page 65).
D Select whether to lower the presser foot automatically
before starting sewing. (page 61)
E Select whether to raise the presser foot automatically
when stopping sewing. (page 61)
F Select whether pressing (Thread cutter button)
automatically lowers the presser foot before cutting the
thread. The presser foot will be raised after the thread is
cut. (page 61)
G You can save the current settings screen image in a USB
media by pressing this button when the USB media is
inserted into the USB port. The files are saved in a folder
labeled [bPocket].
H Reset settings on this page to original default. Some
settings are not reset.
Memo
• Press or to display a different settings
screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
H
A
B
C
9
0
G
D
E
F
Controller Functions that can be specified
Main foot controller Start/Stop
Heel switch Select any of the following:
• [Thread Cutting]
• [Needle Position Up/Down]
• [Single Stitch]
• [Reverse Stitch] (Reinforcement
Stitch)
• [Presser Foot Up/Down]
• [No setting]
Side pedal
LCD SCREEN
28
■ General Settings
1 Select the needle stop position (the needle position
when the machine is not operating) to be up or down.
Select the down position when using the pivot key.
2 Select the operation of the (Needle position
button) from the following two sequences (page 67).
Each press of the (Needle position button):
[ON] : Switches the needle position between being
raised, stopped immediately before entering the fabric,
or lowered.
[OFF] : Switches the needle position between being
raised or lowered.
3 Select the shape of the pointer when a USB mouse is
used.
4 Turn both the upper and bobbin thread sensors [ON] or
[OFF]. If it is turned [OFF], the machine can be used
without thread.
5 Select the speaker volume. Increase the number for
louder volume, decrease for softer volume.
6 Select the brightness of the work area lights.
7 Select the screen display brightness.
8 Set the [Eco Mode] and the [Shutoff Support Mode] to
save the machine power (page 29).
9 Select the length of time until the screen saver appears.
0 Select the image of the screen saver (page 30).
A Select the initial screen that is displayed when the
machine is turned on.
B Select the display language.
C Shows the service count which is a reminder to take your
machine in for regular servicing. (Contact your
authorized Brother dealer for details.)
D Shows the total number of stitches sewn on this
machine.
E Shows the internal machine number for this machine.
F Shows the program version.
CAUTION
• When [Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor] is set
to [OFF], the machine cannot detect tangled
upper thread. Continuing to use the machine
with tangled thread may cause damage.
1
4
6
7
2
3
5
9
8
0
A
B
F
E
C
D
Memo
• Install the latest software. Check with your local
authorized Brother dealer or at “ http://s.brother/
cpeaa/ ” for available updates (page 194).
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
29
1
■ Embroidery Settings
1 Select the embroidery frame to be used.
2 Select the center point marker or grid lines.
3 Select the thread color display on the embroidery
screen; thread number, color name. (page 147)
4 Select the thread brand of the thread color display.
(page 147)
5 Adjust the maximum embroidery speed (page 147).
6 Adjust the upper thread tension for embroidering
(page 144).
7 Select the height of the embroidery foot during
embroidering (page 127).
8 Select the display units for embroidering (mm/inch).
9 Select the color of the background for the embroidery
display area.
0 Select the color of the background for the thumbnail
area.
A Select the size of pattern thumbnails.
B Adjust the distance between the pattern and the basting
stitching. (page 140)
C Adjust the distance between the appliqué pattern and
the outline (page 140).
D Adjust the position and brightness of the embroidery foot
“W+” with LED pointer (this setting is available if
embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer has been
attached.) (page 131).
■ Wireless LAN Settings
1 Enable/Disable the wireless LAN function (page 33).
2 Shows the connected SSID.
3 Set the machine to connect wireless LAN function.
4 Shows the machine name used on the wireless network.
This name is used when transferring files from the
machine to the embroidery editing software (PE-DESIGN
11).
5 Change the machine name used on the wireless
network.
6 Check the wireless LAN status.
7 Display other menus.
8 Reset network operations.
9 Display the introduction to the application.
■ Setting the [Eco Mode] and the [Shutoff
Support Mode]
You can save the machine power by setting the [Eco
Mode] and the [Shutoff Support Mode].
If you leave the machine turned on without using it for the
set period of time, the machine enters in each mode. Press
to display [Eco Mode] and [Shutoff Support Mode].
(page 28)
[Eco Mode];
Machine will enter a sleep mode after the set period of
time. Touch the screen or press the “Start/Stop” button to
continue operating.
[Shutoff Support Mode];
Machine will enter the lower power mode after the set
period of time. Turn the machine off and then back on to
restart operating.
1
4
5
6
2
3
7
B
C
8
9
A
D
0
Note
• If you turn off the machine while the machine is in
the [Eco Mode] or the [Shutoff Support Mode], wait
for about 5 seconds before turning on the machine
again.
1
4
5
6
2
3
7
8
9
LCD SCREEN
30
■ Changing the Screen Saver Image
Instead of the default image, you can select your own
personal images for the screen saver of your machine.
Before changing the screen saver image, prepare the
image on USB media. For details on compatible image
files, refer to “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 192.
a
Press .
The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
The general settings screen appears.
c
Display [Screen Saver] in the general settings screen.
d
Press in [Screen Saver].
e
Press .
f
Connect the USB media that contains your personal
image to the USB port of the machine.
g
Press to select the first image.
h
Select the device that is connected.
A list of your personal images appears on the screen.
* : Delete the selected image.
* : Return to the previous page.
i
Select a file name and then press .
The selected image is stored on your machine.
* : Return to the previous page.
j
Repeat steps g through i to set the remaining
images.
k
Press to return to the original screen.
LCD SCREEN
Getting Ready
31
1
Using the Machine Help
Press to display the machine help screen.
Functions are available from the screen shown below.
1 Explanation for upper threading, winding the bobbin,
preparing to embroider a pattern, and how to use the
machine (page 31)
2 Procedures for sewing utility stitches (page 31)
3 Explanation of the stitch selected
4 Tutorial videos or MPEG-4 (MP4) videos (page 31,
page 32)
5 Introduction to the application
■ Using the Operation Guide Function
Press to display the screen shown
below. Categories are displayed at the top of the screen.
Press a key to see more information about that category.
Some of the functions are described in the movies. Watch
these movies for a better understanding of the functions.
1 Information about the main parts of the machine and
their functions
2 Information about the operation buttons
3 Information about threading the machine, changing
presser feet, etc.
4 Information about attaching the embroidery unit,
preparing fabric for embroidering, etc.
5 Information about troubleshooting
6 Information about cleaning the machine, etc.
■ Using the Sewing Guide Function
Use this function when you are not sure which stitch to
use for your application, or to get advice about sewing
particular stitches.
a
Enter Utility Stitch category from the home page.
b
Press .
c
Press .
The advice screen is displayed.
d
Press the key of the category whose sewing instructions
you wish to view.
e
Read the explanations and select the appropriate
stitch.
The screen displays directions for sewing the
selected stitch. Follow the directions to sew the
stitch.
■ Playing a Tutorial Video
This machine provides tutorial videos on how to use the
machine.
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Select the category and the tutorial video.
1 Category
2 Tutorial video
1
2
3
4
5
2
4
6
1
3
5
21
LCD SCREEN
32
d
Play the tutorial video.
1 Number of seconds elapsed/Total number of seconds
2 Repeat
3 Return to beginning
4 Skip back 10 seconds
5 Play
6 Skip forward 10 seconds
7 Stop
8 Pause
9 Save to machine (when playing from USB media).
A video can be saved to (favorites) of the
machine, from where it can be played. When playing
from the machine’s memory, changes to .
Press to delete the video.
e
After you are finished playing the video, press .
■ Playing MPEG-4 (MP4) Videos
Your MP4 videos can be played from USB media. In
addition, the MP4 video can be saved to the machine so
that a tutorial video on creating a project, for example,
can be viewed at any time. For details on supported file
extensions, refer to “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 192.
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Select the device where the video is saved.
1 Tutorial videos
2 Videos saved on the machine (favorites)
3 Videos from USB media plugged into the USB port
4 Videos from USB media plugged into the USB port for
mouse
d
Select the video that you want to play.
e
Play the video.
* Use the operation keys as described in “Playing a
Tutorial Video” on page 31.
f
After you are finished playing the video, press .
Using the Stitch Pattern Explanation
Function
If you want to know more about the uses of a stitch
pattern, select the pattern and press and then
to see an explanation of the stitch
selection.
Example: Displaying information about
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Press .
The screen shows information.
d
Press to return to the original screen.
Note
• The specifications shown in the movie may differ
from the ones on the actual product, in details.
Memo
• Some type of MP4 file cannot be played with the
machine.
1
9
2
3
4
5
8
7
6
Note
• Long file names may be shortened when they are
displayed.
1 2 3 4
WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION FUNCTIONS
Getting Ready
33
1
This machine supports a wireless network connection.
Using this function, an embroidery pattern edited in
embroidery editing software (PE-DESIGN 11) with wireless
transfer functions can be transferred to the machine from a
computer. Embroidery patterns can be transferred from the
machine to the embroidery editing software. The machine
and computer must be connected to the same network. For
detailed procedures, refer to the manual for the
embroidery editing software. The wireless network must
be set up and enabled to use the special application to
transfer images to the embroidery machine.
Enabling a Wireless Network Connection
The machine can be connected to your wireless
network.
a
Press .
b
Press .
c
Set [Wireless LAN Enable] to [ON].
The machine begins to emit the wireless network
signal.
■ Requirements for a Wireless Network
Connection
The wireless network connection complies with IEEE
802.11 n/g/b standards and uses the 2.4 GHz frequency.
Setting Up the Wireless Network
Connection
There are multiple ways to set up the wireless network
connection. We recommend the method that uses the
wizard on this machine.
■ Using the Wizard to Set Up the Wireless
Network Connection
a
In order to connect your machine to a wireless
network, the security information (SSID and network
key) for your home network will be required. The
network key may also be called a password, security
key or encryption key. First, find your security
information and note it.
b
Press beside [Wireless LAN Setup Wizard].
A list of available SSIDs appears.
WIRELESS NETWORK
CONNECTION FUNCTIONS
Memo
• A wireless network cannot be set up with WPA/
WPA2 Enterprise.
SSID Network Key (Password)
Memo
• The wireless network connection cannot be set up
if you do not have the security information.
• How to find the security information
1 Check the manual provided with your
home network.
2 The default SSID may be the
manufacturer's name or the model
name.
3 If you cannot find the security
information, contact the manufacturer of
the router, your network administrator or
your Internet provider.
WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION FUNCTIONS
34
c
Press beside the SSID that was noted.
The screen for entering the network key (password)
appears.
d
Enter the network key (password) that was noted, and
then press .
1 Text input area
2 Character keys
3 Caps key
4 Space key
5 Letters/numbers/symbols key
6 Backspace key (Deletes the character at the cursor's
position.)
7 Cursor keys (Move the cursor to the left or right.)
e
When the following message appears, press .
When a connection is established, the following
message appears.
f
Press to exit the setup.
Memo
• If the SSID that was noted does not appear in the
list, press .
• If the SSID that was noted is not displayed, specify
it as described below.
1 Select in the list of SSIDs.
2 Enter the desired network SSID, and
then press .
3 Select the authentication method and
encryption mode.
• If the machine had already been connected to the
home network, press , and then select the
saved SSID.
3
2
1
5
4
6
7
Memo
• While connected, the signal strength is indicated
by the icon in the upper-left corner of the display.
• Once a wireless network connection has been set
up, a connection will be established each time the
machine is turned on. However, [Wireless LAN
Enable] in the network settings screen must remain
set to [ON].
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
Getting Ready
35
1
■ Using the [Others] Menu To Set Up the
Wireless Network Connection
The [Others] menu contains the following items.
1 TCP/IP settings can be manually entered.
2 Shows the MAC address.
3 Use when proxy settings are required.
Using a USB Mouse (Sold Separately)
The USB mouse, connected to the machine, can be
used to perform a variety of operations in the screens.
Connect a USB mouse to the USB port.
■ Clicking a Key
When the mouse is connected, the pointer appears on the
screen. Move the mouse to position the pointer over the
desired key, and then click the left mouse button.
1 Pointer
1
2
3
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO
THE MACHINE
Memo
• If a mouse other than the optional USB mouse is
used, it may not perform as described in this
Operation Manual.
1 USB port
2 USB mouse
Note
• Only the left mouse button can be used to perform
operations. Double-clicking has no effect. No other
buttons can be used.
• The mouse pointer does not appear in the screen
saver or opening screen.
a
b
1
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
36
Winding the Bobbin
■ Using the Supplemental Spool Pin
With this machine, you can wind the bobbin during
sewing. While using the main spool pin to sew or
embroider, you can conveniently wind the bobbin using
the supplemental spool pin.
1 Supplemental spool pin
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the spring on the
bobbin winder shaft, and set the bobbin on the shaft.
1 Groove in the bobbin
2 Spring on the bobbin winder shaft
c
Place the spool of thread for the bobbin and the spool
cap onto the supplemental spool pin.
Slide the spool onto the supplemental spool pin so that
the thread unwinds to the front from the bottom.
Otherwise the thread may become tangled around the
supplemental spool pin.
1 The thread unwinds to the front from the bottom.
d
Slide the spool cap onto the spool pin as far as possible
to the right, with the rounded side on the left.
WINDING/INSTALLING THE
BOBBIN
CAUTION
• The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this machine. If bobbins from other models
are used, the machine will not operate
correctly. Use only the included bobbin or
bobbins of the same type (part code: SA156,
SFB: XA5539-151 / 115J05E0001, SFB:
115J05E7001). SA156 is Class 15 type bobbin.
a
a
b
CAUTION
• If the spool or the spool cap is not installed
correctly, the thread may become tangled
around the spool pin, causing the needle to
break.
• Three spool cap sizes are available, allowing
you to choose a spool cap that best fits the size
of spool being used. If the spool cap is too
small for the spool being used, the thread may
catch on the slit in the spool or the machine
may be damaged. When using mini king thread
spool, use the thread spool insert (mini king
thread spool).
For details on thread spool insert (mini king
thread spool), refer to “Memo” on page 37.
a
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
Getting Ready
37
1
e
With your right hand, hold the thread near the thread
spool. With your left hand, hold the end of the thread,
and use both hands to pass the thread through the
thread guide.
1 Thread guide
f
Pass the thread around the pretension disk making sure
that the thread is under the pretension disk.
1 Pretension disk
Make sure that the thread passes under the
pretension disk.
2 Pretension disk
3 Pull it in as far as possible.
g
Wind the thread clockwise around the bobbin 5 or 6
times, pass the thread through the guide slit in the
bobbin winder seat, and then pull the thread to cut it.
1 Guide slit in bobbin winder seat
(with built-in cutter)
Memo
• When using the spool as shown below, use the
small spool cap, and leave a small space between
the cap and the spool.
• When using thread that winds off quickly, such as
transparent nylon thread or metallic thread, place
the spool net over the spool before placing the
spool of thread onto the spool pin.
If the spool net is too long, fold it to fit the size of
the spool.
When threading the spool with the spool net on,
make sure that about 5 cm (2 inches) of thread is
pulled out. It may be necessary to adjust the thread
tension when using the spool net.
• If a spool of thread whose core is 1.2 cm (approx.
1/2 inch) in diameter and 7.5 cm (approx. 3 inches)
high is inserted onto the spool pin, use the thread
spool insert (mini king thread spool).
1 Spool cap (small)
2 Spool (cross-wound
thread)
3 Space
2
1
3
1 Thread spool insert
(mini king thread
spool)
2 1.2 cm (approx. 1/2
inch)
3 7.5 cm (approx. 3
inches)
21
3
a
Note
• Be sure to wind the thread clockwise around the
bobbin, otherwise the thread may become
wrapped around the bobbin winder shaft.
CAUTION
• Be sure to cut the thread as described. If the
bobbin is wound without cutting the thread
using the cutter built into the guide slit in the
bobbin winder seat, the thread may become
tangled in the bobbin or the needle may bend
or break when the bobbin thread starts to run
out.
a
b
c
a
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
38
h
Set the bobbin winding switch to the left, until it clicks
into place.
1 Bobbin winding switch
The bobbin winding window appears.
i
Press .
Bobbin winding starts. The bobbin stops rotating
when bobbin winding is completed. The bobbin
winding switch will automatically return to its
original position.
changes to while the bobbin is
winding.
You can change the winding speed by pressing
(to decrease) or (to increase) in the bobbin
winding window.
j
After bobbin winding is finished, cut the thread with
scissors and remove the bobbin.
■ Using the Spool Pin
You can use the main spool pin to wind the bobbin before
sewing. You cannot use this spool pin to wind the bobbin
while sewing.
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the spring on the
bobbin winder shaft, and set the bobbin on the shaft.
1 Groove in the bobbin
2 Spring on the bobbin winder shaft
c
Remove the spool cap and place the spool of thread for
the bobbin onto the spool pin.
Slide the spool onto the spool pin so that the thread
unwinds to the front from the bottom.
1 Spool pin
2 Spool cap
3 Spool of thread
4 Spool felt
Note
• The sound of winding the bobbin with stiff thread,
such as nylon thread for quilting, may be different
from the one produced when winding normal
thread; however, this is not a sign of a malfunction.
• When winding transparent nylon thread on the
bobbin, stop bobbin winding when the bobbin is
1/2 to 2/3 full. If the bobbin was fully wound with
transparent nylon thread, it may not be wound
neatly, or sewing performance may suffer. In
addition, extreme pressure may be applied to the
bobbin, it may not be possible to remove the
bobbin from the bobbin winder shaft, or the
bobbin may break.
Memo
• Press to minimize the bobbin winding
window. Then, you can perform other operations,
such as selecting a stitch or adjusting the thread
tension, while the bobbin is being wound.
• Press (in top right of the LCD screen) to
display the bobbin winding window again.
a
a
b
a
b
c
d
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
Getting Ready
39
1
d
Slide the spool cap onto the spool pin as far as possible
to the right, with the rounded side on the left.
e
While holding the thread with both hands, pass the
thread through grooves of the thread guide plate.
1 Thread guide plate
f
Pass the thread through the thread guide.
1 Thread guide
g
Pass the thread around the pretension disk making sure
that the thread is under the pretension disk.
Pull the thread as far as possible.
1 Pretension disk
2 Thread guide
h
Follow steps g through j on page 37 through
page 38.
■ Using the Spool Stand (Included with Some
Models)
To wind thread on the bobbin while the spool stand is
installed, pass the thread from the spool through the
thread guide on the telescopic thread guide, and then
wind the bobbin according to steps
e through j of
“Using the Supplemental Spool Pin”on page 37 to
page 38.
a
a
a
b
CAUTION
• When winding thread on the bobbin, do not
cross the bobbin winding thread with the
upper thread in the thread guides.
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
40
Setting the Bobbin
a
Press to lock all keys and buttons and raise the
presser foot.
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, press
to continue.
b
Slide the bobbin cover latch to the right and remove
the bobbin cover.
c
Insert the bobbin into the bobbin case so that the
thread unwinds to the left.
d
Lightly hold down the bobbin with your right hand
(1), and then guide the end of the thread around the
tab of the needle plate cover with your left hand (2).
e
While lightly holding down the bobbin with your right
hand (1), guide the thread through the slit in the
needle plate cover (2) and lightly pull it with your left
hand (3).
f
While lightly holding down the bobbin with your right
hand (1), continue guiding the thread through the slit
with your left hand (2). Then, cut the thread with the
cutter (3).
CAUTION
• Use a bobbin that has been correctly wound
with thread, otherwise the needle may break
or the thread tension will be incorrect.
• Before inserting or changing the bobbin, be
sure to press in the LCD to lock all keys
and buttons. Otherwise injuries may occur if
the “Start/Stop” button or any other button is
pressed and the machine starts sewing.
1 Tab
CAUTION
• Be sure to hold down the bobbin with your
finger and unwind the bobbin thread
correctly, otherwise the thread may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
Memo
• By guiding the thread around the tab of the needle
plate cover, passing the thread as shown by 2 in
this illustration, then lightly pulling the thread at 3,
the thread will enter the tension spring of the
bobbin case to apply the appropriate tension to the
bobbin thread during sewing.
Memo
• Be sure to complete the bobbin threading correctly
according to these instructions. If the thread is
simply placed in the slit in the needle plate cover,
the bobbin thread will not be correctly threaded,
resulting in poor sewing performance or incorrect
thread tension.
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
Getting Ready
41
1
g
Reattach the bobbin cover.
Insert the tab of the bobbin cover into the notch of the
needle plate cover, and then lightly press down on the
right side.
h
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread
There may be some sewing applications where you
want to pull up the bobbin thread; for example, when
making gathers, darts, or doing free motion quilting or
embroidery.
a
Follow steps a to c in “Setting the Bobbin” on
page 40 for installing the bobbin into the bobbin case.
b
Guide the bobbin thread through the groove, following
the arrow in the illustration.
* Do not cut the thread with the cutter.
* Do not replace the bobbin cover.
c
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
d
While lightly holding the upper thread with your left
hand, press (Needle position button) twice to
lower and then raise the needle.
e
Gently pull the upper thread. A loop of the bobbin
thread will come out of the hole in the needle plate.
f
Pull up the bobbin thread, pass it under the presser
foot and pull it about 10 cm (4 inches) toward the back
of the machine, making it even with the upper thread.
g
Reattach the bobbin cover.
Memo
• You can begin sewing without pulling up the
bobbin thread. If you wish to pull up the bobbin
thread before starting to sew, pull up the thread
according to the procedure in “Pulling Up the
Bobbin Thread” on page 41.
Memo
• You can pull up the bobbin thread after threading
the upper thread (“UPPER THREADING” on
page 42).
UPPER THREADING
42
Upper Threading
a
Turn the main power to ON.
b
Press (Presser foot lifter button) to raise the
presser foot.
The upper thread shutter opens so the machine can
be threaded.
1 Upper thread shutter
c
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle.
d
Remove the spool cap and place the spool of thread
onto the spool pin.
Slide the spool onto the spool pin so that the thread
unwinds to the front from the bottom.
1 Spool pin
2 Spool cap
3 Spool of thread
4 Spool felt
e
Slide the spool cap onto the spool pin as far as possible
to the right, with the rounded side on the left.
f
While holding the thread with both hands, pass the
thread through grooves of the thread guide plate.
1 Thread guide plate
UPPER THREADING
CAUTION
• Be sure to thread the machine properly.
Improper threading can cause the thread to
tangle and break the needle, leading to injury.
• When using the walking foot, the side cutter or
accessories not included with this machine,
attach the accessory to the machine after
threading the machine.
• The automatic threading function cannot be
used with the wing needle or the twin needle.
Using (Automatic threading button) may
result in damage to the machine.
Memo
• The automatic threading function can be used with
home sewing machine needle sizes 75/11 through
100/16.
• The following threads are incompatible with the
needle threader. Manually pass the thread through
the eye of the needle.
- Speciality thread such as metallic thread
- Transparent nylon thread
a
Note
• If you try to thread the needle automatically without
raising the needle, the needle may not be thread
correctly and the needle threader may be
damaged.
CAUTION
• Choose a spool cap that best fits the size of
spool being used. For more information, refer
to “Memo” on page 37.
• If the spool or the spool cap is not positioned
correctly, the thread may become tangled
around the spool pin or the needle may break.
a
b
c
d
a
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
43
1
g
While holding the thread in your right hand, pass the
thread through the thread guide in the direction
indicated.
h
Guide the thread down, up, then down through the
groove, as shown in the illustration.
i
Pass the thread through the needle bar thread guide
(marked “6”) by holding the thread with both hands
and guiding it as shown in the illustration.
1 Needle bar thread guide
2 Tab
j
Pass the thread through the notch in the thread guide.
Then firmly pull the thread from front to back into the
slit of the thread guide disk (marked “7”).
1 Notch in thread guide
2 Thread guide disk
k
Press (Presser foot lifter button) to lower presser
foot.
l
Pull the thread up through the thread cutter to cut the
thread, as shown in the illustration.
1 Thread cutter
m
Press (Automatic threading button) to have the
machine automatically thread the needle.
The thread passes through the eye of the needle.
n
Carefully pull the end of the thread that was passed
through the eye of the needle.
* If a loop was formed in the thread passed through
the eye of the needle, carefully pull on the loop of
thread through to the back of the needle.
Memo
• Look in the upper groove area to check if the
thread catches on the thread take-up lever visible
inside the upper groove area.
a
b
a
b
Note
• When using thread that quickly winds off the spool,
it may be difficult to thread the needle if the thread
is cut.
Therefore, instead of using the thread cutter, pull
out about 8 cm (3 inches) of thread after passing it
through the thread guide disks (marked “7”).
1 About 8 cm (3 inches) or more
Memo
• When (Automatic threading button) is
pressed, the presser foot will be automatically
lowered. After threading is finished, the presser
foot moves back to the position before
(Automatic threading button) was pressed.
Note
• Some needles and threads cannot be threaded
with the needle threader. In this case, instead of
using the needle threader after passing the thread
through the needle bar thread guide (marked “6”),
manually pass the thread through the eye of the
needle from the front.
a
a
UPPER THREADING
44
o
Raise the presser foot lever and pull out about 10 cm (4
inches) of the thread, and then pass it under the presser
foot toward the rear of the machine.
1 About 10 cm (4 inches)
■ Using the Vertical Spool Pin (Included with
Some Models)
Use the vertical spool pin when using an irregularly
shaped thread spool, and when sewing with metallic
thread.
a
Insert the vertical spool pin onto the bobbin winder
shaft.
b
Install the spool felt and the thread spool in that order,
and then thread the upper thread.
Memo
• If the needle could not be threaded or the thread
was not passed through the needle bar thread
guides, perform the procedure again starting from
step
c.
Then, pass the thread through the eye of the
needle after step
i.
a
1 Bobbin winder shaft
2 Vertical spool pin
1 Spool felt
2 Thread spool
Memo
• When setting the thread spool, set it so that the
thread winds off from the front of the spool.
• If using metallic thread, we recommend that you
use a 90/14 home sewing machine needle.
• This method keeps the thread from twisting as it
comes off the spool pin.
b
a
b
a
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
45
1
Using the Twin Needle Mode
The twin needle can only be used for stitch patterns that
show after being selected. Before you select a stitch
pattern, make sure the stitch can be sewn in the twin
needle mode (refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART”
on page 194).
a
Press to lock all keys and buttons and then
install the twin needle (“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on
page 48).
b
Thread the machine for the first needle according to
the procedure for threading a single needle (“Upper
Threading” on page 42).
c
Pass the thread through the needle bar thread guides
on the needle bar, then thread the needle on the left
side manually.
1 Needle bar thread guide
d
Pull up the supplemental spool pin and set it in the up
position. Place the additional spool of thread on the
supplemental spool pin, so that the thread unwinds
from the front. Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as
far as possible to secure the thread spool.
1 Spool cap
2 Spool pin
3 Spool of thread
e
Hold the thread from the spool with both hands, and
place the thread in the thread guide.
* Do not place the thread in the pretension disks.
1 Thread guide
f
While holding the thread from the spool, pull the
thread through the lower notch in the thread guide
plate, then through the upper notch. Hold the end of
the thread with your left hand, and then guide the
thread through the groove, following the arrows in the
illustration.
g
Continue threading; however, do not pass the thread in
the needle bar thread guide “6” on the needle bar.
Thread the needle on the right side.
1 Needle bar thread guide
h
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
i
Select a stitch pattern.
* Refer to “Basic Sewing” on page 56 for selecting a
stitch pattern.
* Refer to “STITCH SETTING CHART” on page 194
for the proper stitch to use with presser foot “J”.
CAUTION
• Only use a genuine Brother twin needle.
• When using the twin needle, it is
recommended to use presser foot “J”.
Note
• (Automatic threading button) cannot be used.
Manually thread the twin needle from front to back.
Using (Automatic threading button) may result
in damage to the machine.
a
a
b
c
a
a
UPPER THREADING
46
j
Press to select the twin needle mode.
1 Single needle/twin needle position setting display
appears.
k
Start sewing.
Sample of Twin Needle Sewing
Using the Spool Stand
The included spool stand is useful when using thread
on spools with a large diameter (cross-wound thread).
This spool stand can hold two spools of thread.
■ Using the Spool Stand (Included with Some
Models)
a
Attach the spool stand to the machine. (page 20)
CAUTION
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break, resulting in
damage.
1
• Be sure to use a spool cap
that is slightly larger than the
spool.
If the spool cap that is used is
smaller or much larger than
the spool, the thread may
catch and sewing
performance may suffer.
• When using thread on a thin
spool, place the included
spool felt on the spool pin,
place the thread spool on the
spool pin so that the center of
the spool is aligned with the
hole at the center of the spool
felt, and then insert the spool
cap onto the spool pin.
1 Spool felt
• When using thread on a cone
spool, use the spool holder.
When using cone shaped
thread spool with other than
cotton thread, it is not
necessary to use spool caps.
1 Spool holder
• Depending on the size of
spool or the amount of thread
remaining, choose the
appropriate sized spool cap
(large or medium). Spool cap
(small) cannot be used with
the spool cap base.
1 Spool cap
2 Spool cap base
a
a
a
b
UPPER THREADING
Getting Ready
47
1
b
Place the spool of thread on the spool pin so that the
thread feeds off the spool clockwise. Firmly insert the
spool cap onto the spool pin.
c
Pull the thread off the spool. Pass the thread from the
back to the front through the thread guides at the top.
When using thread that quickly feeds off the spool, such
as metallic thread, use the enclosed ring to prevent the
thread from becoming entangled.
Threading sequence; Pull the thread from the spool,
place the thread through the ring from the bottom up
(1), into the thread guide (2) and through the ring from
the top down (3). When using the ring, do not use the
spool cap base.
d
Pass the thread through the machine’s thread guide
from the right to the left.
1 Thread guide
e
Thread the machine according to the steps f to o of
“Upper Threading” on page 42.
Note
• When using two spools of thread, make sure that
both spools are feeding in the same direction.
• Make sure that the spools do not touch each other,
otherwise the thread will not feed off smoothly, the
needle may break, or the thread may break or
become tangled. In addition, make sure that the
spools do not touch the telescopic thread guide at
the center.
• Make sure that the thread is not caught under the
spool.
Note
• Guide the thread so that it does not become
entangled with the other thread.
• After feeding the thread as instructed, wind any
excess thread back onto the spool, otherwise the
excess thread will become tangled.
2
13
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
48
a
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle.
b
Press to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, press
to continue.
c
Remove the presser foot. (page 50)
d
Use the disc-shaped screwdriver to turn the needle
clamp screw toward you (counterclockwise) to loosen
the screw. Remove the needle.
e
With the flat side of the needle facing the back, insert
the new needle all the way to the top of the needle
stopper (viewing window) in the needle clamp. Use the
disc-shaped screwdriver to securely tighten the needle
clamp screw.
1 Needle stopper
2 Hole for inserting the needle
3 Flat side of the needle
f
Attach the presser foot. (page 50)
g
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
CAUTION
• Always press on the screen to lock all
keys and buttons before changing the needle.
If is not pressed and the “Start/Stop”
button or another operation button is pressed
accidentally, the machine will start and injury
may result.
• Use only home sewing machine needles. Other
needles may bend or break and may cause
injury.
• Never use a bent needle. A bent needle will
easily break and may cause injury.
Memo
• To check the needle correctly, place the flat side of
the needle on a flat surface. Check the needle from
the top and the sides. Throw away any bent
needles.
1 Parallel space
2 Flat surface (bobbin cover, glass, etc.)
Note
• Before replacing the needle, cover the hole in the
needle plate with fabric or paper to prevent the
needle from falling into the machine.
a
b
CAUTION
• Be sure to push in the needle until it touches
the stopper, and securely tighten the needle
clamp screw with the disc-shaped screwdriver.
If the needle is not completely inserted or the
needle clamp screw is loose, the needle may
break or the machine may be damaged.
Memo
• The automatic threading function can be used with
home sewing machine needle sizes 75/11 through
100/16.
a
b
c
FABRIC/THREAD/NEEDLE COMBINATIONS
Getting Ready
49
1
• Needles that can be used with this machine: Home sewing machine needles (size 65/9 - 100/16)
* The larger the number, the larger the needle. As the numbers decrease, the needles get finer.
• Thread that can be used with this machine: 30 - 90 weight
* Never use thread of 20 weight or lower. It may cause machine to malfunction.
* The smaller the number, the heavier the thread. As the numbers increase, the thread gets finer.
• The machine needle and thread that should be used depends on the type and thickness of the fabric. Refer to
the following table when choosing the thread and needle appropriate for the fabric that you wish to sew.
- The combinations shown in the table provide a general guideline. Be sure to sew trial stitches on the actual number of
layers and type of fabric to be used in your project.
- The machine needles are consumables. For safety and best results, we recommend replacing the needle regularly. For
details on when to replace the needle, refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 48.
• In principle, use a fine needle and thread with lightweight fabrics, and a larger needle and heavier thread with
heavyweight fabrics.
• Select a stitch appropriate for the fabric, and then adjust the stitch length. When sewing lightweight fabrics,
make the stitch length finer (shorter). When sewing heavyweight fabrics, make the stitch length coarser
(longer). (page 62)
When sewing stretch fabrics, refer to “Sewing Stretch Fabrics” on page 70.
■ Transparent Nylon Thread
Use a home sewing machine topstitching needle, regardless of the fabric or thread.
■ Embroidery Needles
Use a ball point needle 75/11.
■ Sewing Character Stitch Patterns and Decorative Stitch Patterns (Needles and Threads)
When sewing lightweight, medium weight or stretch fabrics, use a ball point needle (gold colored) 90/14. When sewing
heavyweight fabrics, use a home sewing machine needle 90/14.
In addition, #50 to #60 thread should be used.
FABRIC/THREAD/NEEDLE COMBINATIONS
Fabric Type/Application
Thread
Size of needle
Stitch length
mm (inch)
Type Weight
Lightweight
fabrics
Lawn, georgette, challis, organdy,
crepe, chiffon, voile, gauze, tulle,
lining, etc.
Polyester thread 60 - 90
65/9 - 75/11
Fine stitches
1.8-2.5
(1/16-3/32)
Cotton thread
Silk thread
50 - 80
Medium weight
fabrics
Broadcloth, taffeta, gabardine,
flannel, seersucker, double gauze,
linen, terry cloth, waffle weave,
sheeting, poplin, cotton twill, satin,
quilting cotton, etc.
Polyester thread 60 - 90
75/11 - 90/14
Regular stitches
2.0-3.0
(1/16-1/8)
Cotton thread
Silk thread
50 - 60
Heavyweight
fabrics
Denim (12 ounces or more), canvas,
etc.
Polyester thread
Cotton thread
30 100/16
Coarse stitches
2.5-4.0
(3/32-3/16)
Denim (12 ounces or more), canvas,
tweed, corduroy, velour, melton
wool, vinyl-coated fabric, etc.
Polyester thread 60
90/14 - 100/16
Cotton thread
Silk thread
30 - 50
Stretch fabrics
(knit fabrics, etc.)
Jersey, tricot, T-shirt fabric, fleece,
interlock, etc.
Polyester thread
Cotton thread
Silk thread
50
Ball point needle
75/11 - 90/14
Setting appropriate for
the fabric thickness
For top-stitching
Polyester thread
Cotton thread
30 90/14 - 100/16
Setting appropriate for
the fabric thickness
50 - 60 75/11 - 90/14
CAUTION
• The appropriate fabric, thread and needle combinations are shown in the preceding table. If the
combination of the fabric, thread and needle is not correct, particularly when sewing heavy fabrics (such
as denim) with thin needles (such as 65/9 to 75/11), the needle may bend or break. In addition, the
stitching may be uneven or puckered or there may be skipped stitches.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
50
Replacing the Presser Foot
a
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle.
b
Press to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, press
to continue.
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
d
Press the black button on the presser foot holder and
remove the presser foot.
e
Place the new presser foot under the holder, aligning
the foot pin with the notch in the holder. Lower the
presser foot lever so that the presser foot pin snaps into
the notch in the holder.
f
Raise the presser foot lever to check that the presser
foot is securely attached.
g
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included
Adapter
You can attach the presser feet using the included
adapter and small screw.
For example, the walking foot, the free motion echo
quilting foot “E” and so on.
Following procedure shows how to attach the walking
foot as an example.
■ Attaching the Walking Foot (Sold Separately)
The walking foot holds the fabric between the presser foot
and the feed dogs to feed the fabric. This enables you to
have better fabric control when sewing difficult fabrics
(such as quilted fabrics or velvet) or fabrics that slip (such
as vinyl, leather, or synthetic leather).
a
Follow the steps in “Replacing the Presser Foot” on
page 50.
b
Loosen the screw of the presser foot holder to remove
the presser foot holder.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
CAUTION
• Always press on the screen to lock all
keys and buttons before changing the presser
foot. If is not pressed and the “Start/
Stop” button or another button is pressed, the
machine will start and may cause injury.
• Always use the correct presser foot for the
selected stitch pattern. If the wrong presser
foot is used, the needle may strike the presser
foot and bend or break, and may cause injury.
• Only use presser feet made for this machine.
Using other presser feet may lead to accident
or injury.
• Make sure that the presser foot is installed in
the correct direction, otherwise the needle
may strike the presser foot, breaking the
needle and causing injuries.
1 Black button
2 Presser foot holder
1 Notch
2 Pin
a
b
a
b
Note
• When sewing with the walking foot, sew at medium
to low speeds.
• The walking foot can only be used with straight or
zigzag stitch patterns. Do not sew reverse stitches
with the walking foot.
1 Presser foot holder
screw
2 Presser foot holder
a
b
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
Getting Ready
51
1
c
Remove the screw of the presser foot completely from
the presser foot shaft.
d
Set the adapter on the presser foot bar, aligning the flat
side of the adapter opening with the flat side of the
presser bar. Push it up as far as possible, and then
tighten the screw securely with the disc-shaped
screwdriver.
e
Turn the included small screw 2 or 3 times with your
hand.
f
Set the operation lever of the walking foot so that the
needle clamp screw is set in the fork. Position the
shank of the walking foot on the presser foot bar.
g
Lower the presser foot lever. Insert the screw, and
tighten the screw securely with the screwdriver.
Using the Dual Feed Foot
Dual feed foot enables you to have best fabric control
when sewing difficult fabrics that slip easily, such as
quilted fabrics or fabrics that tend to stick to the bottom
of a presser foot, such as vinyl, leather or synthetic
leather.
■ Attaching the Dual Feed Foot
a
Remove the presser foot. (page 50)
b
Loosen the screw of the presser foot holder to remove
the presser foot holder.
1 Operation lever
2 Needle clamp screw
3 Fork
4 Walking foot shank
5 Presser foot bar
a
b
c
d
e
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to tighten the
screw securely. If the screw is loose, the
needle may strike the presser foot and cause
injury.
• Be sure to rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check that the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If the needle
strikes the presser foot, injury may result.
Note
• When sewing with the dual feed foot, sew at
medium to low speeds.
Memo
• When selecting stitches to be used with the dual
feed foot, only the stitches that can be used will be
activated on the display.
1 Presser foot holder
screw
2 Presser foot holder
a
b
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
52
c
Position the dual feed foot to the presser foot bar by
aligning the notch of the dual feed foot to the large
screw.
Side view
d
Hold the dual feed foot in place with your right hand,
then using the disc-shaped screwdriver securely tighten
the large screw.
e
Plug the connector of the dual feed foot into the jack
on the back of your machine.
f
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and the
previous screen is displayed.
■ Attaching/Detaching Toe
Attach the toe by aligning the pins with the notches and
snap it into place.
If you push down on the front and back part of the dual
feed foot, the toe of the dual feed foot will snap off.
■ Using the Dual Feed Position Lever
When the feed position lever is up, the black roller belt on
the dual feed is not engaged.
When the feed position lever is down, the black roller belt
on the dual feed is engaged.
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw. If the screw is loose, the needle may
strike the presser foot and possibly cause
injury.
1 Pins
2 Notches
Note
• Do not operate the lever while sewing.
a
b
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
Getting Ready
53
1
■ Adjusting the Amount of Fabric Feeding from
the Dual Feed Foot
The dual feed mechanism pulls the top fabric according to
the set stitch length. With troublesome fabrics, fine tune
the set length, by changing the dual feed feed adjustment
in the settings screen.
a
Press .
The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
The sewing settings screen appears.
c
Display [Dual Feed Feed Adjustment] in the sewing
settings screen.
d
Use or to increase or decrease the feeding of
the top fabric.
* Select [00] for sewing in most cases.
* If the feed amount for the top fabric is too little,
causing the fabric to be longer than the bottom
fabric, press to increase the feed amount for the
top fabric.
* If the feed amount for the top fabric is too much,
causing the fabric to be shorter than the bottom
fabric, press to decrease the feed amount for the
top fabric.
e
Press to return to the original screen.
Note
• As a default, some keys mentioned in the following
procedures appear in light gray and are not
available. To enable the keys for specifying the
settings, attach the dual feed foot to the machine.
The keys are enabled after the dual feed foot is
detected.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
54
Chapter 2
Sewing Basics
SEWING
56
Stitch Types
■ Utility Stitches
1 Straight/Overcasting
2 Decorative Stitches
3 Heirloom Stitches
4 Buttonholes/Bar tacks
5 Multi-directional
6 Sewing Quilting Stitches
■ Character/Decorative Stitches
1 Decorative stitch patterns
2 7mm decorative stitch patterns
You can set stitch length and width.
3 Satin stitch patterns
4 7mm satin stitch patterns
You can set stitch length and width.
5 Cross stitch
6 Utility decorative stitch patterns
7 Alphabet characters (gothic font)
8 Alphabet characters (handwriting font)
9 Alphabet characters (outline)
0 Cyrillic font
A MY CUSTOM STITCH (page 100)
You can design original stitches.
B Stitch patterns stored in MY CUSTOM STITCH
(page 103)
C Stitch patterns saved in the machine’s memory (page 99)
D Stitch patterns saved in USB media (page 99)
E Stitch patterns to be transferred via the wireless network
(page 99)
Basic Sewing
a
Turn the main power to ON and press to display
the utility stitches, and press (Needle position
button) to raise the needle.
SEWING
CAUTION
• To avoid injury, pay special attention to the
needle while the machine is in operation. Keep
your hands away from moving parts while the
machine is in operation.
• Do not stretch or pull the fabric during
sewing. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not use bent or broken needles. Doing so
may lead to injury.
• Do not attempt to sew over basting pins or
other objects during sewing. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury.
• If stitches become bunched, lengthen the
stitch length setting before continuing sewing.
Otherwise, the needle may break and cause
injury.
• This machine is equipped with a thread
detection device. If the “Start/Stop” button is
pushed before the upper threading is done, the
machine will not operate properly. Also,
depending on the stitch pattern selected, the
machine may feed the fabric even if the needle
is raised. This is due to the needle bar release
mechanism. At these times, the machine will
make a sound different from what is made
during normal sewing. This is not the sign of a
malfunction.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Note
• First, perform a trial sewing, using a piece of fabric
and thread that are the same as those used for
your project.
1
3
2
4
7
0
A
C
6
9
5
8
D
B
E
SEWING
Sewing Basics
57
2
b
Select the category you want.
c
Press the key of the stitch you want to sew.
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
• For details on the key functions, refer to “Key
Functions” on page 25.
• If necessary, change to the desired stitch width or
stitch length. (page 62)
The symbol of the correct presser foot will be
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD screen.
d
Install the presser foot (page 50).
e
Set the fabric under the presser foot. Hold the fabric
and thread in your left hand, and rotate the handwheel
to set the needle in the sewing start position.
f
Lower the presser foot.
* You do not have to pull up the bobbin thread.
g
Adjust the sewing speed with the speed control slide.
* You can use this slide to adjust sewing speed during
sewing.
h
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start sewing.
* Guide the fabric lightly by hand.
i
Press the “Start/Stop” button again to stop sewing.
j
Press (Thread cutter button) to trim the upper
and bobbin threads.
The needle will return to the up position
automatically.
CAUTION
• Always use the correct presser foot. If the
wrong presser foot is used, the needle may
strike the presser foot and bend or break,
possibly resulting in injury.
Refer to “STITCH SETTING CHART” on
page 194 for presser foot recommendations.
1 Slow
2 Fast
Memo
• When the foot controller is being used, you cannot
start sewing by pressing the “Start/Stop” button.
CAUTION
• Do not press (Thread cutter button) after
the threads have been cut. Doing so could
tangle the thread or break the needle and
damage the machine.
• Do not press (Thread cutter button) when
there is no fabric set in the machine or during
machine operation. The thread may tangle,
possibly resulting in damage.
a
b
SEWING
58
k
When the needle has stopped moving, raise the presser
foot and remove the fabric.
■ Using the Foot Controller
You can also use the foot controller to start and stop
sewing.
a
Turn off the machine.
b
Insert the foot controller plug into the foot controller
jack on the machine.
c
Turn on the machine.
d
Slowly depress the foot controller to start sewing.
e
Release the foot controller to stop the machine.
Combining Stitch Patterns
Stitch patterns from the following categories can be
combined.
Example:
a
Press .
b
Select the following stitch pattern (8-35).
c
Press so that it displays .
d
Press .
The display returns to the stitch selection screen.
Note
• When cutting thread, such as metallic thread or
other decorative threads, use the thread cutter on
the side of the machine. Cut transparent nylon
thread in the same way.
Memo
• When the foot controller is connected, you cannot
use the “Start/Stop” button.
• The foot controller cannot be used when
embroidering.
1 Foot controller jack
Memo
• The speed that is set using the sewing speed
controller will be the foot controller’s maximum
sewing speed.
a
SEWING
Sewing Basics
59
2
e
Select a font.
f
Enter characters.
• : Select a stitch pattern individually.
• : Delete the selected stitch pattern.
• : Enter a space.
g
If you want to sew the stitch pattern continuously,
press .
The stitch pattern turns continuous.
■ Inserting Stitch Patterns
a
Press or to select the stitch pattern at the
position where a new stitch pattern will be added.
b
Press .
c
Select a new stitch pattern.
The new stitch pattern is added immediately after the
stitch pattern selected in step
a.
Sewing Reverse Stitches/Reinforcement
Stitches
Reverse/reinforcement stitches are generally necessary
at the beginning and end of sewing. You can use
(Reverse stitch button) to sew reverse/reinforcement
stitches. When you keep pressing (Reinforcement
stitch button), the machine will sew reinforcement
stitch at that point 3 to 5 stitches, and then stop.
(page 13)
If the automatic reinforcement stitch is selected on the
screen, reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches) will
be sewn automatically at the beginning of sewing when
the “Start/Stop” button is pressed. Press (Reverse
Memo
• When sewing is completed, trim any excess thread
between characters.
1 (Reverse stitch
button)
2 (Reinforcement
stitch button)
SEWING
60
stitch button) or (Reinforcement stitch button) to
sew reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
automatically at the end of sewing (Refer to the next
procedure “Automatic Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitching”.).
The operation performed when the button is pressed
differs depending on the selected stitch pattern. (Refer
to “STITCH SETTING CHART” on page 194.)
Automatic Reverse/Reinforcement Stitching
After selecting a stitch motif, turn on the automatic
reinforcement stitching function before sewing, and the
machine will automatically sew reinforcement stitches
(or reverse stitches, depending on the stitch motif) at the
beginning and end of sewing.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press to set the automatic reinforcement stitching
function.
The key will display as .
c
Set the fabric in the start position and start sewing.
1 Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue sewing.
d
Press (Reverse stitch button) or
(Reinforcement stitch button).
1 Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) and stop.
The operation performed when the button is pressed
differs depending on the selected stitch pattern. Refer to
the following table for details on the operation that is
performed when the button is pressed.
1 Reverse stitch
2 Reinforcement stitch
Memo
• Some stitches, such as buttonholes and bar tacks,
require reinforcement stitches at the beginning of
sewing. If you select one of these stitches, the
machine will automatically turn on this function (the
key appears as when the stitch is selected).
a
b
a
(Reverse stitch
button)
(Reinforcement
stitch button)
+
Machine sews
reverse stitches
while holding
(Reverse stitch
button).
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding
(Reinforcement
stitch button).
+
Machine sews
reverse stitches
while holding
(Reverse stitch
button).*
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding
(Reinforcement
stitch button).
with a stitch
other than reverse or
reinforcement stitch
pattern selected.
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding
(Reverse stitch
button).
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding
(Reinforcement
stitch button).
+
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches while
holding
(Reverse stitch
button).
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches after
completing the stitch
pattern, when
(Reinforcement
stitch button) is
pressed.
+
Machine sews
reverse stitches and
stops sewing when
the (Reverse
stitch button) is
pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing, reverse
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing when
(Reinforcement
stitch button) is
pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing, reverse
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
a
SEWING
Sewing Basics
61
2
* If [Reinforcement Priority] of the settings screen is set to
[ON] (page 27), reinforcement stitches are sewn instead of
reverse stitches.
Automatic Presser Foot Lowering Function
and Thread Cutting Function
By setting the machine to automatically raise and lower
the presser foot, sewing operations can be performed
more smoothly.
+
Machine sews
reverse stitches and
stops sewing when
(Reverse stitch
button) is pressed.*
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing when
(Reinforcement
stitch button) is
pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
with a stitch
other than reverse or
reinforcement stitch
pattern selected.
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing when
(Reverse stitch
button) is pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing when
(Reinforcement
stitch button) is
pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
+
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing when
(Reverse stitch
button) is pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing after
completing the stitch
pattern, when
(Reinforcement
stitch button) is
pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
(Reverse stitch
button)
(Reinforcement
stitch button)
1 When [Auto Down] is set to [ON], pressing the “Start/Stop”
button or depressing the foot controller automatically lowers
the presser foot (if it is raised) before starting to sew.
2 When [Auto Up] is set to [ON], the presser foot is raised when
stopping sewing.
The presser foot is raised to the height specified for [Presser
Foot Height] (page 27).
When the pivot setting ( ) is selected, the presser foot is
raised to the height specified for [Pivoting Height] (page 27).
3
When [Press to Trim] is set to [ON], pressing (Thread
cutter button) automatically lowers the presser foot (if it is
raised) before cutting the thread. The presser foot will be
raised after the thread is cut.
1
2
3
STITCH SETTINGS
62
Setting the Stitch Width/Stitch Length/“L/R
Shift”
When you select a stitch, your machine automatically
selects the appropriate stitch width, stitch length, and L/R
Shift. However, if needed, you can change any of the
individual settings.
■ Setting the Stitch Width
Follow the steps below when you want to change the
zigzag stitch pattern width.
For an alternate method of changing the stitch width
using the speed controller, refer to page 79.
■ Setting the Stitch Length
Follow the steps below when you want to change the
stitch pattern length.
■ Setting the “L/R Shift”
Follow the steps below when you want to change the
placement of the zigzag stitch pattern by moving it left
and right.
Setting the Thread Tension
You may need to change the thread tension, depending
on the fabric and thread being used. Follow the steps
below to make any necessary changes.
* Press to return the thread tension to the
original setting.
■ Proper Thread Tension
The upper thread and the bobbin thread should cross near
the center of the fabric. Only the upper thread should be
visible from the right side of the
fabric, and only the bobbin thread should be visible
from the wrong side of the fabric.
STITCH SETTINGS
Note
• Settings for some stitches cannot be changed
(page 194).
• If you turn off the machine or select another stitch
without saving stitch setting changes (page 63), the
stitch settings will return to their default settings.
Memo
• Press to save the stitch settings.
• Press to check changes made to the stitch.
• Press to return the original setting.
CAUTION
• After adjusting the stitch width or the “L/R
Shift”, slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the needle
does not touch the presser foot. If the needle
hits the presser foot, the needle may bend or
break.
• If the stitches get bunched together, lengthen
the stitch length and continue sewing. Do not
continue sewing without lengthening the stitch
length. Otherwise, the needle may break and
cause injury.
1 Wrong side
2 Surface
3 Upper thread
4 Bobbin thread
STITCH SETTINGS
Sewing Basics
63
2
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight
If the bobbin thread is visible from the right side of the
fabric, the upper thread is too tight.
Press , to loosen the upper thread.
■ Upper Thread is Too Loose
If the upper thread is visible from the wrong side of the
fabric, the upper thread is too loose.
Press , to tighten the upper thread.
Saving Your Stitch Settings
The settings for the zigzag stitch width, stitch length,
thread tension, automatic thread cutting, automatic
reinforcement stitching, etc., are preset in the machine
for each stitch. However, if you have specific settings
that you wish to reuse later for a stitch, you can change
the settings so that they can be saved for that stitch. Five
sets of settings can be saved for a single stitch.
■ Saving Settings
a
Select a stitch.
b
Specify your preferred settings.
c
Press .
The settings are saved and the original screen
automatically appears.
■ Retrieving Saved Settings
a
Select a stitch.
b
Press .
c
Press the numbered key of the settings to be retrieved.
* Press to return to the original screen without
retrieving settings.
1 Numbered keys
d
Press .
The selected settings are retrieved, and the original
screen automatically appears.
■ Returning the Selected Stitch Pattern Saved
Settings to the Default Settings
a
Press .
b
Press .
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too tight. In this case, refer to
“Setting the Bobbin” on page 40 and rethread the
bobbin thread.
1 Bobbin thread
2 Upper thread
3 Surface
4 Locks appear on
surface of fabric
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too loose. In this case, refer
to “Upper Threading” on page 42 and rethread the
upper thread.
1 Upper thread
2 Bobbin thread
3 Wrong side
4 Locks appear on wrong
side of fabric
Memo
• To save new settings when there are already 5 sets
of settings saved for a stitch, press . Press
the numbered key of the setting to be deleted.
Press , press and then . The
new setting will be saved in place of the recently
deleted setting.
• You can delete all the saved settings by pressing
.
1
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
64
Automatic Thread Cutting
After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the automatic
thread cutting function before sewing, and the machine
will automatically sew reinforcement stitches (or
reverse stitches, depending on the stitch pattern) at the
beginning and end of sewing, and trim the threads at
the end of sewing. This function is useful when sewing
buttonholes and bar tacks.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press to set the automatic thread cutting function.
You get
, and the machine is set for
automatic thread cutting function and automatic
reverse/reinforcement stitching.
* To turn off the automatic thread cutting function,
press again, so it appears as .
c
Set the fabric in the start position and start sewing.
The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue sewing.
d
Once you have reached the end of the stitching, press
(Reverse stitch button) or (Reinforcement
stitch button) once.
If stitching, such as buttonholes and bar tacking, that
includes reinforcement stitching has been selected, this
operation is unnecessary.
After the reverse stitching (or reinforcement stitching)
has been done, the machine stops, and the threads
are cut.
Adjusting the Needle Drop Point with the
Guideline Marker
The red guideline marker indicates the sewing position
on the fabric. You can adjust the sewing position by
moving the guideline marker while checking the
guideline marker on the fabric.
a
Press to display the guideline marker.
The guideline marker scale appears.
* Depending on the setting of “Initial Position” in the
settings screen, the initial needle drop point is
scaled as either 0.0 mm or 3.5 mm.
b
Use or to move the needle drop point.
Adjust the position from 15.5 mm (5/8 inch) to the
right of the left needle to -3.5 mm (-1/8 inch) to the
left of the left needle.
1 Press to flip the guideline marker position on the center
needle position.
c
Press again to stop using the guideline marker.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
1 The point where the
“Start/Stop” button was
pressed.
2 The point where
(Reverse stitch button)
or (Reinforcement
stitch button) was
pressed.
3 The thread is cut here.
32
1
CAUTION
• The guideline marker is a laser; therefore, do
not stare at the laser light directly. Otherwise
it may cause blindness.
1
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Sewing Basics
65
2
■ Adjusting the Guideline Marker Position
If the guideline marker indicates the position incorrectly in
the center needle position, adjust the initial position in the
settings screen.
a
Press .
The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
The sewing settings screen appears.
c
Display [Guideline Marker Adjustment] in the sewing
settings screen.
d
Press .
e
Use or to adjust the guideline marker position.
* : Move the guideline marker to the left.
: Move the guideline marker to the right.
f
Press twice to return to the original screen.
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the Guideline
Marker
a
Follow steps from a to d to display the [Guideline
Marker Adjustment] screen.
b
Use or to adjust the brightness of the guideline
marker.
Set the brightness of the guideline marker from [1] for
a dim marker, to [5] for the brightest marker, on the
fabric.
c
Press twice to return to the original screen.
Pivoting
If the pivot function is selected, the machine stops with
the needle lowered (in the fabric) and the presser foot is
automatically raised to an appropriate height when the
“Start/Stop” button is pressed. When the “Start/Stop”
button is pressed again, the presser foot is automatically
lowered and sewing continues. This function is useful
for stopping the machine to rotate the fabric.
a
Select a stitch.
CAUTION
• When the pivot setting is selected, the
machine starts when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed or the foot controller is pressed down
even if the presser foot has been raised. Be
sure to keep your hands and other items away
from the needle, otherwise injuries may occur.
Memo
• When the pivot setting is selected, the height of the
presser foot when sewing is stopped can be
changed according to the type of fabric being
sewn. Press to display [Pivoting Height] of
the settings screen. Press or to select the
height. To raise the presser foot further, increase
the setting.
Note
• The [Needle Position – Up/Down] of the settings
screen, must be set in the down position
for
the pivot function to be used. When [Needle
Position – Up/Down] is set in the raised position
, appears as light gray and cannot be used.
• The pivot function can only be used with stitches
where presser foot “J”, “N” or “X” (Couching foot)
is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen. If
any other stitch is selected, appears as light
gray and is not available.
• If the pivot function is selected, and
beside [Presser Foot Height] in the settings screen
are not available and the setting cannot be
changed.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
66
b
Press to select the pivot setting.
The key appears as .
c
Set the fabric in the start position and start sewing.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the machine at
the point where the sewing direction changes.
The machine stops with the needle in the fabric, and
the presser foot is raised.
e
Rotate the fabric, and then press the “Start/Stop”
button.
The presser foot is automatically lowered, and
sewing continues.
Using the Knee Lifter
Using the knee lifter, you can raise and lower the
presser foot with your knee, leaving both hands free to
handle the fabric.
a
Align the tabs on the knee lifter with the notches in the
knee lifter slot on the front of the machine. Insert the
knee lifter bar as far as possible.
b
Use your knee to move the knee lifter bar to the right
in order to raise the presser foot. Slowly return the
knee lifter bar to the left to lower the presser foot.
Note
• To use the pivot function, the needle position must
be set to .
Memo
• If [Auto Up] of [Automatic Presser Foot Lift] in the
machine settings screen is set to [ON], the presser
foot is raised when the machine is stopped.
Note
• If the knee lifter bar is not pushed into the mounting
slot as far as possible, it may come out during use.
CAUTION
• Be sure to keep your knee away from the knee
lifter during sewing. If the knee lifter is pushed
during machine operation, the needle may
break or the thread tension may loosen.
Memo
• When the presser foot is in the up position, move
the knee lifter to the far right and then move the
knee lifter to the left to return the presser foot to the
down position.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Sewing Basics
67
2
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic
Presser Foot Pressure)
The thickness of the fabric is automatically detected
and the presser foot pressure is automatically adjusted
with an internal sensor while sewing, to insure that your
fabric is fed smoothly. The fabric sensor system works
continuously while sewing. This function is useful for
sewing heavyweight fabrics (page 69), or quilting
(page 78).
Press , and then set [Automatic Fabric Sensor
System] to [ON]. (page 27)
Needle Position - Stitch Placement
When the [Needle Position - Stitch Placement] is set to
[ON], the needle will stop immediately before entering
the fabric so the needle drop point at the beginning of
stitching can be checked. Each press of (Needle
position button) changes the needle to the next
position. When the [Needle Position - Stitch Placement]
is [OFF], each press of (Needle position button)
simply raises and then lowers the needle.
Press , and then set [Needle Position - Stitch
Placement] to [ON] or [OFF]. (page 28)
[Needle Position - Stitch Placement] is [ON]
* When the needle is nearly lowered by pressing
(Needle position button), the feed dogs are lowered.
At this time, the fabric can be shifted to finely adjust
the needle drop point.
[Needle Position - Stitch Placement] is [OFF]
Using the Straight Stitch Needle Plate and
the Straight Stitch Foot
The straight stitch needle plate and the straight stitch
foot can only be used for straight stitches (middle
needle position stitches). Use the straight stitch needle
plate and the straight stitch foot when sewing thin
fabrics or when sewing small pieces which tend to sink
into the hole of the regular needle plate during sewing.
The straight stitch foot is perfect to reduce puckering on
lightweight fabrics. The small opening on the foot
provides support for the fabric as the needle travels
through the fabric.
a
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle
and turn the main power to OFF.
b
Remove the needle and the presser foot holder.
(page 48, page 50)
c
Remove the bobbin case and the needle plate.
(page 176, page 177)
1 2.25 mm (1/8 inch)
2 4.25 mm (3/16 inch)
3 6.25 mm (1/4 inch)
4 8.5 mm (5/16 inch)
CAUTION
• Always use the straight stitch foot in
combination with the straight stitch needle
plate.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
68
d
Align the two screw holes in the straight stitch needle
plate with the two holes in the needle plate mounting
base, and then fit the straight stitch needle plate onto
the machine.
e
Lightly finger-tighten the screw on the right side of the
needle plate. Then, use the included disc-shaped
screwdriver to firmly tighten the screw on the left side.
Finally, firmly tighten the screw on the right side.
f
Insert the bobbin case in its original position, and then
attach the needle plate cover. (page 176)
g
After reinstalling the needle plate cover, select any of
the straight stitches.
h
Insert needle and attach the straight stitch foot.
i
Turn the main power to ON and then start sewing.
* After sewing, make sure to remove the straight stitch
needle plate and the straight stitch foot, and reinstall
the regular needle plate, the needle plate cover and
the presser foot “J”.
1 Round hole
Note
• If the needle plate has been removed, check
machine operations to confirm that installation has
been completed correctly. (page 181)
• Selecting unavailable stitches will cause an error
message to be displayed.
• When the straight stitch needle plate is on the
machine, the needle will automatically move to the
middle position.
Memo
• You cannot change the needle position using the L/
R Shift.
• Always secure the needle plate before inserting the
bobbin case into its original position.
CAUTION
• Slowly rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) before sewing and make
sure that the needle is not contacting the
straight stitch foot and straight stitch needle
plate.
1 Notch
2 Pin
a
USEFUL SEWING TIPS
Sewing Basics
69
2
Sewing Tips
■ Trial Sewing
Before starting your sewing project, we recommend
sewing trial stitches using thread and scrap fabric that are
the same as those used for your project.
While checking the sewing results, adjust the thread
tension as well as the stitch length and width according to
the number of fabric layers and stitch that is sewn.
■ Sewing Curves
Sew slowly while keeping the seam parallel with the
fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the curve.
Shorten the stitch length setting to obtain a fine stitch. Sew
slowly, keeping the seams parallel with the fabric edge as
you guide the fabric around the curve.
■ Changing Sewing Direction
Stop the machine. Leave the needle in the fabric, and
press (Presser foot lifter button) to raise the presser
foot. Using the needle as a pivot, turn the fabric so that
you can sew in the new direction. Press (Presser foot
lifter button) to lower the presser foot and start sewing.
The pivot setting is useful when changing the sewing
direction. (page 65)
Sewing Various Fabrics
■ Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics
The machine can sew fabrics up to 6 mm (approx. 1/4
inch) thick. If the thickness of a seam causes sewing to
occur at an angle, help guide the fabric by hand and sew
on the downward slope.
If the Fabric does not Fit under the Presser Foot
If the presser foot is in the up position, and you are sewing
heavyweight or multiple layers of fabric which do not fit
easily under the presser foot, use the presser foot lever to
raise the presser foot to its highest position. The fabric will
now fit under the presser foot.
If the Fabric does not Feed
If the fabric does not feed when starting to sew or when
sewing thick seams, press the presser foot locking pin on
the left side of presser foot “J”.
a
Raise the presser foot.
b
While keeping the presser foot locking pin on the left
side of presser foot “J” pressed in, press (Presser
foot lifter button) to lower the presser foot.
USEFUL SEWING TIPS
Note
• Other factors, such as fabric thickness, stabilizer
material, etc., also have an effect on the stitch, so
you should always sew a few trial stitches before
beginning your project.
• When sewing decorative satin stitch or satin stitch
patterns, there may be shrinking or bunching of
stitches, so be sure to use a stabilizer material.
CAUTION
• Do not forcefully push fabrics more than 6 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) thick through the machine.
This may cause the needle to break and cause
injury.
USEFUL SEWING TIPS
70
c
Release the presser foot locking pin.
The presser foot remains level, enabling the fabric to
be fed.
■ Sewing Lightweight Fabrics
Place thin paper or tear away embroidery stabilizer under
thin fabrics to make sewing easier. Gently tear off the
paper or the stabilizer after sewing.
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics
First, baste together the pieces of fabric, and then sew
without stretching the fabric.
In addition, a better result can be achieved by using thread
for knits or a stretch stitch.
■ Sewing Leathers or Vinyl Fabrics
When sewing fabrics that may stick to the presser foot,
such as leather or vinyl fabrics, replace the presser foot
with the walking foot*, non stick foot* or roller foot*.
* Items sold separately, please contact your authorized
Brother dealer.
If the leather or vinyl fabric sticks to the flat bed
attachment, sew with copy paper or tracing paper
placed on top of the flat bed attachment so the fabric
moves smoothly.
If the paper is positioned so that it does not cover the
needle plate, the paper will not be sewn together with
the fabric.
Sewing Decorative Stitch Patterns
Memo
• Once the trouble spot has been passed, the foot
will return to its normal position.
1 Thin paper
Memo
• For best results when sewing stretch fabrics,
decrease the pressure of the presser foot
(page 27).
1 Basting stitching
a
a
1 Leather
1 Copy paper or
tracing paper
Fabric When sewing on stretch fabrics, lightweight
fabrics, or fabrics with coarse weaves, attach
stabilizer on the wrong side of the fabric. An
alternative would be to place the fabric on thin
paper such as tracing paper.
1 Fabric
2 Stabilizer
3 Thin paper
Thread #50 - #60
Needle With lightweight, regular, or stretch fabrics: the
Ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14
With heavyweight fabrics: home sewing machine
needle 90/14
a
a
a
b
c
Chapter 3
Various Stitches
UTILITY STITCHES
72
Straight Stitches
1 Left needle position
2 Middle needle position
■ Changing the Needle Position (Left or Middle
Needle Position Stitches Only)
When you select left or middle needle position stitches,
you can use and in the L/R Shift display to
change the position of the needle. Match the distance
from the right edge of the presser foot to the needle with
the stitch width, then align the edge of the presser foot
with the edge of the fabric during sewing for an attractive
finish.
Example: Left/Middle needle position stitches
■ Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on the Needle
Plate or Bobbin Cover (with Mark)
While sewing, align the edge of the fabric with the 5/8
inch (approx. 1.6 cm) mark on the needle plate or bobbin
cover (with mark) depending on the needle position (left
or middle (center) needle position stitches only).
For stitches with a left needle position
(Stitch width: 0.0 mm)
1 Seam
2 Presser foot
3 Centimeters
4 Inches
5 Needle plate
6 5/8 inch (approx. 1.6 cm)
UTILITY STITCHES
CAUTION
• Before replacing the presser foot, be sure to
press to lock all keys and buttons,
otherwise injuries may occur if the “Start/
Stop” button or any other button is pressed
and the machine starts. For details on changing
the presser foot, refer to “Replacing the Presser
Foot” on page 50.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
1 Stitch width
a
12.0 mm
(approx.
1/2 inch)
8.5 mm
(approx.
5/16 inch)
6.5 mm
(approx.
1/4 inch)
5.0 mm
(approx.
3/16 inch)
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
73
3
For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
(Stitch width: 3.5 mm)
1 Seam
2 Presser foot
3 Inches
4 Bobbin cover (with mark)
5 5/8 inch (approx. 1.6 cm)
■ Basting
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Keep pressing (Reverse stitch button) or
(Reinforcement stitch button) to sew 4 stitches of
reinforcement stitches, then press “Start/Stop” button
to continue sewing.
c
When sewing is finished, sew reinforcement stitches,
and then cut the threads to a generous length.
■ Dart Seam
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Sew a reverse stitch at the beginning of the dart and
then sew from the wide end to the other end without
stretching the fabric.
1 Basting
c
Cut the thread at the end leaving 5 cm (approx. 2
inches), and then tie both ends together.
* Do not sew a reverse stitch at the end.
d
Insert the ends of the thread into the dart with a hand
sewing needle.
e
Iron the dart to one side so that it is flat.
Memo
• Before sewing, pull up the bobbin thread, align it
with the upper thread, and then pull them to the
back of the machine. (page 41) For clean stitching,
hold these thread ends when starting to sew.
• You can set the stitch length between 5 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm (approx. 1-3/16
inches).
1 Between 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm
(approx.1-3/16 inches)
UTILITY STITCHES
74
■ Gathering
Use on waists of skirts, sleeves of shirts, etc.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and
the thread tension to approximately 2.0 (weaker
tension).
c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by about 10 cm
(4 inches) (page 41).
1 Upper thread
2 Bobbin thread
3 About 10 cm (4 inches)
d
Sew two rows of straight stitches parallel to the seam
line, then trim excess thread leaving about 5 cm
(2 inches).
1 Seam line
2 1 cm to 1.5 cm (approx. 3/8 inch to 9/16 inch)
3 About 5 cm (2 inches)
e
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the desired amount of
gather, then tie the threads.
f
Smooth the gathers by ironing them.
g
Sew on the seam line and remove the basting stitch.
■ Flat Fell Seam
Use for reinforcing seams and finishing edges neatly.
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Sew the finish line, then cut half of the seam allowance
from the side on which the flat fell seam will lie.
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reverse stitches
will be sewn automatically at the beginning of
sewing. Press (Reinforcement stitch button) to
sew a reinforcement stitch and trim the thread
automatically at the end of sewing.
1 About 1.2 cm (1/2 inch)
2 Wrong side
c
Spread the fabric out along the finish line.
1 Finish line
2 Wrong side
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
75
3
d
Lay both seam allowances on the side of the shorter
seam (cut seam) and iron them.
1 Wrong side
e
Fold the longer seam allowance around the shorter
one, and sew the edge of the fold.
1 Wrong side
Finished flat fell seam
1 Surface
■ Pintuck
a
Mark along the folds on the wrong side of the fabric.
1 Wrong side
b
Turn the fabric and iron the folded parts only.
1 Surface
c
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
d
Sew a straight stitch along the fold.
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reverse stitches
will be sewn automatically at the beginning of
sewing. Press (Reinforcement stitch button) to
sew a reinforcement stitch and trim the thread
automatically at the end of sewing.
1 Width for pintuck
2 Wrong side
3 Surface
e
Iron the folds in the same direction.
UTILITY STITCHES
76
Zigzag Stitches
■ Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a Zigzag
Stitch)
a
Remove the bobbin cover from the machine (page 40).
b
Thread the gimp thread through the hole in the cord
guide bobbin cover from top to bottom. Position the
thread in the notch at the back of the cord guide
bobbin cover.
c
Snap the cord guide bobbin cover into place, making
sure that the gimp thread can be fed freely.
* Make sure there are no restrictions when feeding the
thread.
d
Set the zigzag width from 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 -
3/32 inch).
e
Attach presser foot “N”.
f
Position the fabric right side up on top of the cord and
place the cord to the rear of the machine under the
presser foot.
g
Lower the presser foot and start sewing to make a
decorative finish.
Overcasting
Sew overcasting stitches along the edges of cut fabric to
prevent them from fraying.
■ Using Overcasting Foot “G”
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach overcasting foot “G”.
c
Position the fabric with the edge of the fabric against
the guide of the presser foot, and then lower the
presser foot lever.
d
Rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise).
Check that the needle does not touch the presser foot.
e
Sew with the edge of the fabric against the presser foot
guide.
1 Notch
2 Gimp thread
1 Fabric (right side)
2 Gimp thread
a
b
a
b
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
CAUTION
• When using overcasting foot “G”, be sure
select a stitch that can be used with
overcasting foot “G”. If you sew with the
incorrect stitch, the needle may hit the presser
foot, bending the needle or damaging the
presser foot.
1 Guide
1 The needle should
not touch the
center bar
1 Needle drop point
G
a
1
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
77
3
f
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop sewing when you
are finished, and raise the presser foot and needle to
pull the fabric under the presser foot towards the back
of the machine.
■ Using Zigzag Foot “J”
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
c
Sew along the edge of the fabric with the needle
dropping off the edge at the right.
Quilting
You can make beautiful quilts quickly and easily with
this machine. When making a quilt, you will find it
convenient to use the knee lifter and foot controller to
free your hands for other tasks (“Using the Foot
Controller” on page 58 and /or “Using the Knee Lifter”
on page 66).
The 30 quilting stitches Q-01 through Q-30 and the
utility stitches with “P” or “Q” indicated on their key
are useful for quilting.
The “P” or “Q” at the bottom of the key display
indicates that these stitches are intended for (“Q”)
quilting and (“P”) piecing.
■ Piecing
Sewing two pieces of fabric together is called piecing.
When cutting pieces for quilt blocks, make sure the seam
allowance is 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch).
a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Align the edge of the fabric with the edge of the presser
foot, and start sewing.
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam
allowance along the left edge of the presser foot
with
(Q-02) selected, the width (which is the
CAUTION
• Be sure to pull the fabric backward after
finished sewing. If you pull the fabric toward
side or forward, the presser foot pin may be
damaged.
• If thread is tangled on the presser foot, remove
the entangled thread, and then raise the
presser foot lever to remove the presser foot. If
the presser foot is raised while entangled with
thread, the presser foot may be damaged.
1 Needle drop point
Note
• Fine adjustment of the stitching on the fabric can
be done with “L/R Shift”. Before sewing your
project, be sure to sew trial stitches using the same
conditions as in the actual project.
a
Memo
• When a stitch pattern in the Quilting Stitches
category (only quilting stitches marked with “Q”) is
selected, a finer stitch width can be set than that
available with stitch patterns in other categories.
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
UTILITY STITCHES
78
needle position) should be set to 5.50 mm (approx.
7/32 inch).
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance
along the left edge of the presser foot with
selected, the width should be set to 1.50 mm
(approx. 1/16 inch).
* To change the needle position, use or in
the L/R Shift display.
■ Piecing Using the 1/4 Quilting Foot with Guide
This quilting foot can sew an accurate 1/4 inch or 1/8 inch
seam allowance.
It can be used for piecing together a quilt or for
topstitching.
a
Press , and then attach the 1/4 quilting foot with
guide.
b
Use the guide and marks on the presser foot to sew
accurate seam allowances.
Piecing a 1/4 inch seam allowance
Sew keeping the edge of the fabrics against the guide.
Creating an accurate seam allowance
Use the mark on the foot to begin, end, or pivot 1/4 inch
from edge of fabric.
Topstitching quilting, 1/8 inch
Sew with the edge of the fabric aligned with the left side of
the presser foot's front section.
■ Quilting
Sewing the quilt top, batting, and backing together is
called quilting. You can sew the quilt with the dual feed
foot to keep the quilt top, batting, and backing from
sliding. The dual feed foot has a motorized belt that moves
together with the feed dogs in the needle plate during
sewing.
For straight line quilting, use the dual feed foot and the
straight stitch needle plate.
1 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4
inch)
1 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4
inch)
Memo
• In the case Q-01(center, at L/R Shift 3.5 mm) is
selected, if the guideline marker is set at 10.0 mm
(3.5 mm plus 6.5 mm, close to 1/4 inch), you can
sew piecing by referring to the guideline marker.
1 Guide
a
a
a
1 Guide
2 1/4 inch
Memo
• For accurate fabric placement, refer to “Aligning
the Fabric with a Mark on the Needle Plate or
Bobbin Cover (with Mark)” on page 72.
1 Align this mark with
edge of fabric to begin.
2 Beginning of stitching
3 End of stitching
4 Opposite edge of fabric
to end or pivot
5 1/4 inch
Memo
• For details on pivoting, refer to “Pivoting” on
page 65.
1 Surface of fabric
2 Seam
3 1/8 inch
a
b
a
e
e
c
d
b
a
b
c
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
79
3
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach the dual feed foot (page 51).
c
Place one hand on each side of the presser foot to hold
the fabric secure while sewing.
■ Appliqué
a
Use two-sided stabilizer material to secure the
appliqué piece to the base fabric.
b
Select .
c
Attach the zigzag foot “J”.
d
Turn the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise),
and then begin sewing around the edge of the
appliqué, making sure that the needle drops just
outside of the appliqué.
When sewing around corners, stop the machine with
the needle in the fabric just outside of the appliqué,
raise the presser foot lever, and then turn the fabric as
needed to change the sewing direction.
■ Quilting with Satin Stitches
For better fabric control, use the foot controller to sew
with satin stitches. Set the speed control slide to control
the stitch width to make subtle changes in the stitch width
during sewing.
a
Attach the foot controller (page 58).
b
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
c
Press in the length display to shorten the stitch
length.
d
Press to use the speed control slide to control
the stitch width.
e
Set the [Width Control] to [ON].
f
Press .
The display will return to the original screen.
g
While sewing, slide the sewing speed controller to
adjust the stitch width.
* Adjust the sewing speed with the foot controller.
h
When you are finished sewing, set the [Width Control]
back to [OFF].
Memo
• Sew at slow to medium speed.
• Always check to be sure that your quilting project is
securely basted before beginning to sew.
Memo
• The setting will vary according to the kind of fabric
and the thickness of the thread, but a length of 0.3
to 0.5 mm (approx. 1/64 to 1/32 inch) is best for
satin stitches.
1 narrower
2 wider
a
b
UTILITY STITCHES
80
■ Free Motion Quilting
With free motion quilting, the feed dogs can be lowered
by pressing , so that the fabric can be moved freely in
any direction.
For free motion quilting, use free motion quilting foot “C”
or free motion open toe quilting foot “O” depending on
the stitch that is selected, and set the machine to free
motion sewing mode. In this mode, the presser foot is
raised to the necessary height for free motion sewing.
We recommend attaching the foot controller and sewing
at a consistent speed. You can adjust the sewing speed
with the speed control slide on the machine.
Using free motion quilting foot “C” (Included with some
models)
Use the free motion quilting foot “C” with straight stitch
needle plate for free motion sewing.
Free motion quilting foot “C”
a
Attach the straight stitch needle plate (page 67).
b
Select a stitch.
c
Press to set the machine to free motion sewing
mode.
The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised to
the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
1 Free motion quilting foot “C”
d
Remove the presser foot holder (page 50).
e
Attach free motion quilting foot “C” at the front with
the presser foot holder screw aligned with the notch in
the quilting foot.
f
Hold the quilting foot in place with your right hand,
and tighten the presser foot holder screw using the
disc-shaped screwdriver with your left hand.
Memo
• With free motion quilting, control the feeding speed
of the fabric to match the sewing speed. If the
fabric is moved faster than the sewing speed, the
needle may break or other damage may result.
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor detects
the thickness of the fabric, and the quilting foot is
raised to the height specified in the machine
settings screen. Press to display [Free
Motion Foot Height] of the settings screen. Press
or to select the height that the quilting foot
is raised above the fabric.
• When stitch Q-01 or 1-31 is selected, free motion
quilting foot “C” is indicated in the upper-left
corner of the screen. When the other stitches are
selected, free motion open toe quilting foot “O” is
indicated in the screen.
CAUTION
• When using free motion quilting foot “C”, be
sure to use the straight stitch needle plate. If the
needle is moved to any position other than the
middle (center) needle position, the needle may
break, which may result in injuries.
C
1 Round hole
1 Presser foot holder
screw
2 Notch
Note
• Make sure that the quilting foot is attached
properly and not slanted.
a
1
b
a
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
81
3
g
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut, and then
move the fabric at a consistent pace in order to sew
uniform stitches roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/
32 inch) in length.
h
Press to cancel the free motion sewing mode.
Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
i
After sewing, make sure to remove the straight stitch
needle plate and presser foot “C”, and reinstall the
regular needle plate and the needle plate cover.
Using free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
The free motion open toe quilting foot “O” is used for free
motion quilting with zigzag or decorative stitches or for
free motion quilting of straight lines on fabric with an
uneven thickness. Various stitches can be sewn using free
motion open toe quilting foot “O”. For details on the
stitches that can be used, refer to “STITCH SETTING
CHART” on page 194.
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
a
Press to set the machine to free motion sewing
mode.
The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised to
the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
b
Select a stitch.
c
Remove the presser foot holder (page 50).
d
Attach free motion open toe quilting foot “O” by
positioning the pin of the quilting foot above the
needle clamp screw and aligning the lower-left of the
quilting foot and the presser bar.
e
Hold the quilting foot in place with your right hand,
and tighten the presser foot holder screw using the
disc-shaped screwdriver with your left hand.
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
disc-shaped screwdriver. Otherwise, the
needle may touch the quilting foot, causing it
to bend or break.
1 Stitch
Note
• Free motion open toe quilting foot “O” can also be
used with the straight stitch needle plate. We
recommend using free motion open toe quilting
foot “O” with free motion sewing of fabrics of
uneven thicknesses.
1 Pin
2 Needle clamp screw
3 Presser bar
Note
• Make sure that the quilting foot is not slanted.
1 Presser foot holder
screw
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
disc-shaped screwdriver. Otherwise, the
needle may touch the quilting foot, causing it
to bend or break.
O
O
UTILITY STITCHES
82
f
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut, and then
move the fabric at a consistent pace in order to sew
uniform stitches roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/
32 inch) in length.
g
Press to cancel the free motion sewing mode.
Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
■ Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion Echo
Quilting Foot “E” (Included with Some
Models)
Sewing quilting lines at equal distances around a motif is
called echo quilting. The quilting lines, which appear as
ripples echoing away from the motif, are the
distinguishing characteristic of this quilting style. Use the
free motion echo quilting foot “E” for echo quilting. Using
the measurement on the presser foot as a guide, sew
around the motif at a fixed interval. We recommend
attaching the foot controller and sewing at a consistent
speed.
Free motion echo quilting foot “E” measurements
a
Select .
b
Press to set the machine to free motion sewing
mode.
The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised to
the necessary height, then the feed dogs are lowered
for free motion sewing.
c
Remove the presser foot holder and then attach the
adapter. (page 50)
d
Position the free motion echo quilting foot “E” on the
left side of the presser bar with the holes in the quilting
foot and presser bar aligned.
e
Tighten the screw with the included screwdriver
(large).
f
Using the measurement on the quilting foot as a guide,
sew echo quilting around the motif.
Finished project
1 Stitch
1 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4
inch)
2 9.5 mm (approx. 3/8
inch)
E
E
b
a
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver (large). Otherwise, the
needle may touch the quilting foot, causing it
to bend or break.
1 6.4 mm (approx.
1/4 inch)
a
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
83
3
g
Press to cancel the free motion sewing mode.
Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
Blind Hem Stitches
Secure the lower edge of skirts and pants with a blind hem.
a
Turn the skirt or pants inside out.
b
Fold the lower edge of fabric to the desired length to
be hemmed and then press.
c
Using tailor's chalk, mark the fabric about 5 mm (3/16
inch) from the edge of the fabric, and then baste it.
d
Fold in the fabric (to the right side) along the basting.
e
Unfold the edge of fabric, and position the fabric with
the wrong side facing up.
f
Select a stitch.
g
Attach blind stitch foot “R”.
h
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the free arm.
i
Slide the item that you wish to sew onto the free arm,
make sure that the fabric feeds correctly, and then start
sewing.
Memo
• When the size of cylindrical pieces is too small to
slide onto the arm or the length is too short, the
fabric will not feed and desired results may not be
achieved.
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Lower edge of fabric
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Lower edge of fabric
4 Desired length for hem
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Lower edge of fabric
4 Desired length for hem
5 5 mm (3/16 inch)
6 Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
a
b
c
1
2
1
2
1
3
3
4
2
1
2
1
2
356
4
1
2
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Lower edge of fabric
4 Desired length for hem
5 5 mm (3/16 inch)
6 Basting
7 Basting point
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Edge of fabric
4 Desired edge of hem
5 Basting point
6 Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1 Free arm
1
3
6
5
1
1
2
7
4
a
b
f
c
a
a
c
d
a
f
a
a
b
e
a
UTILITY STITCHES
84
j
Position the fabric with the edge of the folded hem
against the guide of the presser foot, and then lower
the presser foot lever.
k
Adjust the stitch width until the needle slightly catches
the fold of the hem. (page 62)
When you change the needle drop point, raise the
needle, and then use and to decide the
needle drop point. (The stitch width setting is in
neither millimeters nor inches.)
l
Sew with the fold of the hem against the presser foot
guide.
m
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop sewing when you
are finished, and raise the presser foot and needle to
pull the fabric under the presser foot towards the left
of the machine.
n
Remove the basting stitching and turn the fabric with
the right side facing out.
■ If the Needle Catches Too Much of the Hem
Fold
The needle is too far to the left.
Press to decrease the stitch width so that the needle
slightly catches the fold of the hem.
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
1 Wrong side of
fabric
2 Fold of hem
3 Guide
1 Needle drop point
1 Thick fabric
2 Normal fabric
Memo
• Blind hem stitches cannot be sewn if the left needle
drop point does not catch the fold. If the needle
catches too much of the fold, the seam appearing
on the right side of the fabric will be very large,
leaving an unattractive finish.
1 Wrong side of
fabric
2 Right side of
fabric
a
b
1
2
a
b
a
b
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
85
3
Shell Tuck Stitches
The gathers that look like shells are called “shell tucks”.
They are used to decorate trims, the front of blouses or
cuffs made of thin fabrics.
a
Draw equally spaced lines along the bias, and then fold
the fabric along the lines.
b
Select , and then increase the thread tension.
c
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
d
Sew while making sure that the needle drops slightly
off the edge of the fabric.
One fold at a time, continue folding the fabric along the
line, then sewing it.
e
After sewing is finished, remove the fabric. Unfold the
fabric, and then iron the tucks down to one side.
Scallop Stitches
The wave-shaped repeated stitch pattern that looks like
shells is called “scalloping”. It is used on the collars of
blouses and to decorate the edges of projects.
a
Select .
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Stitch along the edge of the fabric, making sure not to
sew directly on the edge of the fabric.
d
Trim along the stitches.
• Be careful not to cut the stitches.
Smocking Stitches
The decorative stitch created by stitching or
embroidering over gathers is called “smocking”. It is
used to decorate the front of blouses or cuffs.
The smocking stitch adds texture and elasticity to fabric.
a
Select the straight stitch, and then adjust the stitch
length to 4.0 mm (3/16 inch) and loosen the thread
tension.
b
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
c
Sew parallel stitching at intervals of 1 cm (3/8 inch)
and pull the bobbin threads to create gathers.
Smooth the gathers by ironing them.
d
Select a stitch.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
1 Needle drop
point
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
a
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
UTILITY STITCHES
86
e
Stitch between the straight stitches and pull out the
threads for the straight stitches.
Fagoting
Stitching across an open seam is called “fagoting”. It is
used on blouses and children's clothing. This stitch is
more decorative when thicker thread is used.
a
Use an iron to fold the two pieces of fabric along their
seams.
b
Baste the two pieces of fabric, separated by about 4
mm (3/16 inch), onto thin paper or a sheet of water
soluble stabilizer.
If you draw a line down the middle of the thin paper or
water soluble stabilizer, sewing is easier.
c
Select a stitch.
d
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
e
Set the stitch width to 7.0 mm (1/4 inch).
f
Sew with the center of the presser foot aligned along
the center of the two pieces of fabric.
g
After sewing is finished, remove the paper.
Attaching Tape or Elastic
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch),
and loosen the upper thread tension to 2.0 (page 62).
c
Sew two rows of straight stitches on the right side of
the fabric, then pull the bobbin thread to create the
necessary gather.
d
Place the tape over the gather, and hold it in place with
basting pins.
e
Select a stitch.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
1 About 4 mm (3/16
inch)
2 Thin paper or water
soluble stabilizer
3 Basting stitching
a
b
c
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
Memo
• Be sure that neither automatic reinforcement
nor automatic thread cutting is selected.
Memo
• Before sewing the straight stitch, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) and pull
up the bobbin thread. Holding the top and bobbin
thread, pull a length of thread out from the rear of
the machine. (Be sure that the presser foot is
raised.)
1 Tape
a
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
87
3
f
Sew over the tape (or elastic).
g
Pull out the straight stitch threads.
Heirloom
■ Hemstitching (Daisy Stitch)
Use for sewing tablecloths, decorative hems, and
decorative stitching on shirt fronts.
a
Insert a type 130/705H, size 100/16 Wing needle.
* This specialty sewing needle is not furnished with
your machine. It must be purchased separately.
b
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “N”.
c
Start sewing.
CAUTION
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting
pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The
thread could tangle or the needle could break,
causing injury.
Memo
• Use a light to medium weight homespun fabric with
a little stiffness.
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
CAUTION
• A more attractive finish can be obtained if you
use a “130/705H Wing” needle when sewing
these stitch patterns. If using a wing needle
and the stitch width has been set manually,
check that the needle will not touch the
presser foot by carefully rotating the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
before starting to sew.
• When sewing with the wing needle, select a
stitch width of 6.0 mm (15/64 inch) or less,
otherwise the needle may bend or break.
UTILITY STITCHES
88
One-Step Buttonholes
With one-step buttonholes, you can make buttonholes
appropriate to the size of your button.
One-step buttonholes are sewn from the front of the
presser foot to the back, as shown below.
1 Reinforcement stitching
a
Select a buttonhole stitch, and attach buttonhole foot
“A”.
Position the upper thread under the presser foot by
guiding thread through the hole in the presser foot
before attaching the buttonhole foot “A”.
b
Mark the position and length of the buttonhole on the
fabric.
c
Pull out the button holder plate on the presser foot,
and insert the button that will be put through the
buttonhole. Then tighten the button holder plate
around the button.
d
Align the presser foot with the mark on the fabric, and
lower the presser foot.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
1 Marks on fabric
2 Buttonhole sewing
Memo
• The maximum buttonhole length is about 28 mm
(approx. 1-1/16 inches) (diameter + thickness of
the button).
1 Button holder
plate
1 Mark on the
fabric
2 Marks on the
presser foot
Note
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole foot
backward as far as possible as shown in the
illustration, making sure that there is no gap behind
the part of the foot marked “A”. If the buttonhole
foot is not slid back as far as possible, the
buttonhole will not be sewn at the correct size.
a
b
A
a
b
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
89
3
e
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is positioned
behind the metal bracket on the buttonhole foot.
f
Gently press the end of the upper thread, and then
start sewing.
* Feed the fabric carefully by hand while the
buttonhole is sewn.
Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
g
Insert a pin along the inside of one of the bar tacks, and
then insert the seam ripper into the center of the
buttonhole and cut towards the pin.
■ Sewing Stretch Fabrics
When sewing on stretch fabric with or , sew the
buttonhole stitches over a gimp thread.
a
Hook the gimp thread onto the back of presser foot
“A”. Insert the ends into the grooves at the front of the
presser foot, and then temporarily tie them there.
b
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
c
Once sewing is completed, gently pull the gimp thread
to remove any slack, and trim off any excess.
1 Basting pin
2 Seam ripper
CAUTION
• When using the seam ripper to open the
buttonhole, do not put your hand or finger in
the path of the ripper. The ripper may slip and
cause injury. Do not use the seam ripper in any
other way than how it is intended.
a
b
Memo
• For keyhole buttonholes, use the eyelet punch to
make a hole in the rounded end of the buttonhole.
Then insert a pin along the inside of one of the bar
tacks, insert a seam ripper into the hole made with
the eyelet punch, and cut towards the pin.
1 Upper thread
1 Eyelet punch
2 Basting pin
a
b
a
UTILITY STITCHES
90
■ Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that Do Not Fit
into the Button Holder Plate
Use the markings on the presser foot scale to set the size of
the buttonhole. Two marks on the presser foot scale equal
5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch).
Add the button diameter and thickness together, and then
set the plate at the calculated value.
Four-Step Buttonholes
You can sew 4-step buttonholes using the following 4
stitches together. You can sew any desired length for
the buttonhole when using 4-step buttonholes. 4-step
buttonholes are a good option when attaching oversize
buttons.
Four-step buttonholes are sewn as shown below.
a
Mark the position and length of the buttonhole on the
fabric.
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”, and select stitch
to sew the left side of the buttonhole.
c
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start sewing.
d
Sew the desired length for the buttonhole and press the
“Start/Stop” button again.
e
Select stitch to sew the bar tack and press the
“Start/Stop” button.
The machine will automatically stop after sewing the
bar tack.
f
Select stitch to sew the right side of the
buttonhole, and press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
sewing.
g
Sew the right side of the buttonhole and press the
“Start/Stop” button again.
* Sew the right side of the buttonhole the same length
as the left.
h
Select stitch to sew the bar tack and then press the
“Start/Stop” button.
The machine will automatically sew off the bar tack
tie and stop when the bar tack is complete.
i
Raise the presser foot and remove the fabric.
j
Open the buttonhole (page 89).
1 Presser foot scale
2 Button holder plate
3 Combined
measurement of
diameter + thickness
4 5 mm (approx. 3/16
inch)
Memo
• For example, for a button with a diameter of 15 mm
(approx. 9/16 inch) and a thickness of 10 mm
(approx. 3/8 inch), the scale should be set at 25
mm (approx. 1 inch).
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
a
b
c
d
1 10 mm (approx. 3/8
inch)
2 15 mm (approx. 9/16
inch)
1 Marks on fabric
2 Buttonhole
sewing
a
b
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
91
3
■ Darning
Use darning stitches for mending and other applications.
Darning is performed by sewing from the front of the
presser foot to the back as shown below.
1 Reinforcement stitches
a
Select or , and attach buttonhole foot “A”.
Position the upper thread under the presser foot by
guiding thread through the hole in the presser foot
before attaching the buttonhole foot “A”.
b
Set the scale to the desired length of the darning.
c
Check that the needle drops at the desired position and
lower the presser foot, making sure the upper thread
passes underneath the buttonhole foot.
d
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is positioned
behind the metal bracket on the buttonhole foot.
e
Gently press the end of the upper thread, and then
press the “Start/Stop” button to start the machine.
Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
1 Presser foot scale
2 Completed length
measurement
3 Width 7 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch)
4 5 mm (approx. 3/
16 inch)
Memo
• The maximum length for darning is 28 mm (approx.
1-1/16 inches).
a
d
b
c
Note
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole foot
backward as far as possible as shown in the
illustration, making sure that there is no gap behind
the part of the foot marked “A”. If the buttonhole
foot is not slid back as far as possible, the
buttonhole will not be sewn at the correct size.
UTILITY STITCHES
92
Bar Tacks
Use bar tacks to reinforce areas that will be subject to
strain, such as pocket corners.
a
Select .
b
Attach buttonhole foot “A” and set the scale to the
length of the bar tack you wish to sew.
Position the upper thread under the presser foot by
guiding thread through the hole in the presser foot
before attaching the buttonhole foot “A”.
c
Set the fabric so that the pocket moves toward you
during sewing.
d
Check the first needle drop point and lower the presser
foot.
e
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is positioned
behind the metal bracket on the buttonhole foot.
f
Gently press the end of the upper thread and start
sewing.
When sewing is completed, the machine will sew
reinforcement stitches and stop automatically.
■ Bar Tacks On Thick Fabrics
Place a piece of folded fabric or cardboard beside the
fabric being sewn to level the buttonhole foot and allow
for easier and even feeding.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
1 Presser foot scale
2 Completed length
measurement
3 5 mm (approx. 3/16
inch)
Memo
• Bar tacks can be between 5 mm (approx. 3/16
inch) and 28 mm (approx. 1-1/16 inches).
Note
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole foot
backward as far as possible as shown in the
illustration, making sure that there is no gap behind
the part of the foot marked “A”. If the buttonhole
foot is not slid back as far as possible, the
buttonhole will not be sewn at the correct size.
a
b
c
1 2 mm (approx. 1/16
inch)
1 Presser foot
2 Thick paper
3 Fabric
a
a
b
c
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
93
3
Button Sewing
Buttons with 2 or 4 holes can be attached, using the
machine.
a
Select .
The feed dogs are lowered automatically.
• Do not use the automatic thread cutting function
when sewing buttons. Otherwise, you will lose the
thread ends.
b
Raise the presser foot.
c
Attach button sewing foot “M”, slide the button along
the metal plate and into the presser foot, and lower the
presser foot.
d
Rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
to check that the needle goes into each hole correctly.
* If the needle does not reach the holes on the left
side, adjust the stitch width.
* To attach the button more securely, repeat the
process.
e
Gently press the end of the upper thread and start
sewing.
The machine stops automatically when sewing is
finished.
f
From the wrong side of the fabric, pull the end of the
bobbin thread to pull the upper thread through to the
wrong side of the fabric. Tie the two thread ends
together and cut the threads.
g
After the button is attached, select another stitch and
rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
to raise the feed dogs.
■ Attaching 4-Hole Buttons
Sew the two holes closest to you. Then raise the presser
foot and move the fabric so that the needle goes into the
next two holes, and sew them in the same way.
■ Attaching a Shank to the Button
a
Pull the shank lever toward you before sewing.
b
Pull the two ends of the upper thread between the
button and the fabric, wind them around the shank,
and then tie them firmly together.
c
Tie the ends of the bobbin thread from the beginning
and end of sewing together on the wrong side of the
fabric.
d
Cut off any excess thread.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
1 Button
2 Metal plate
1 Align the buttonholes
with the marks on
button sewing foot “M”.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
button during sewing. The needle may break
and cause injury.
a
b
a
1 Shank lever
a
UTILITY STITCHES
94
Eyelet
Use this stitch for making belt holes and other similar
applications.
a
Select a stitch.
b
Use in either the stitch width display or the
stitch length display to choose the size of the eyelet
(page 62).
c
Attach monogramming foot “N”, then rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to check
the needle drop point.
d
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
When sewing is finished, the machine sews
reinforcement stitches and stops automatically.
e
Use the eyelet punch to make a hole in the center of
the stitching.
Multi-Directional Sewing (Straight Stitch
and Zigzag Stitch)
Use these stitch patterns to attach patches or emblems
to pant legs, shirt sleeves, etc.
a
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the free-arm.
b
Select and attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Set the needle in the fabric at the sewing start point,
and sew seam “1” as shown.
d
Select and sew seam “2” as shown.
* The fabric will move sideways, guide the fabric by
hand to keep sewing straight.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
1 Needle drop point
a
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
Memo
• Insert the tubular piece of fabric onto the free-arm,
and then sew in the order shown in the illustration.
1 Start Point
a
UTILITY STITCHES
Various Stitches
95
3
e
Select and sew seam “3” as shown.
The fabric feeds forward while stitching backward.
f
Select and sew seam “4” as shown.
The seam will be connected to the starting point of
seam 1.
Zipper Insertion
■ Centered Zipper
Use for bags and other such applications.
a
Select .
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight stitches up to
the zipper opening. Change to a basting stitch
(page 73) and sew to the top of the fabric.
c
Press the seam allowance open and attach the zipper
with a basting stitch in the middle of each side of the
zipper tape.
d
Remove presser foot “J”. Align the right side of the pin
in zipper foot “I” with the presser foot holder, and
attach the zipper foot.
e
Topstitch 7 to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 to 3/8 inch) from
the seamed edge of the fabric, then remove the basting.
■ Inserting a Side Zipper
Use for side zippers in skirts or dresses.
a
Select .
CAUTION
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
does not strike the presser foot. If another
stitch is selected, the needle will strike the
presser foot, causing the needle to break and
possibly causing injury.
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
1 Basting stitches
2 Reverse stitches
3 End of zipper opening
4 Wrong side
1 Basting stitches
2 Zipper
3 Wrong side
1 Right
2 Left
3 Needle drop
point
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
a
c
b
d
cc
a
b
a
b
c
UTILITY STITCHES
96
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight stitches up to
the zipper opening. Change to a basting stitch and sew
to the top of the fabric.
c
Press the seam allowance open and align the folded
hem along the teeth of the zipper, while maintaining 3
mm (approx. 1/8 inch) of sewing space.
d
Remove presser foot “J”.
e
Align the right side of the pin in zipper foot “I” with
the presser foot holder, and attach the presser foot.
f
Set the presser foot in the 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
margin.
g
Starting from the end of the zipper opening, sew to a
point about 5 cm (2 inches) from the edge of the fabric,
then stop the machine.
h
Pull down the zipper slider, then continue sewing to
the edge of the fabric.
i
Close the zipper, turn the fabric over, and sew a
basting stitch.
j
Remove the presser foot, and reattach it so that the left
side of the pin is attached to the presser foot holder.
* When sewing the left side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the right side of the presser foot.
When sewing the right side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the left side of the presser foot.
k
Set the fabric so that the left edge of the presser foot
touches the edge of the zipper teeth.
l
Sew reverse stitches at the top of the zipper, then
continue sewing.
m
Stop sewing about 5 cm (2 inches) from the edge of the
fabric, leave the needle in the fabric, and remove the
basting stitches.
n
Open the zipper and sew the rest of the seam.
1 Reverse stitches
2 Wrong side of fabric
3 Basting stitches
4 End of zipper opening
1 Zipper pull tab
2 Wrong side of fabric
3 Zipper teeth
4 End of zipper opening
5 3 mm (approx. 1/8
inch)
1 Right
2 Left
3 Needle
drop point
1 About 5 cm ( 2
inches)
2 3 mm (approx. 1/8
inch)
1 Front of the skirt
(wrong side of
fabric)
2 Basting stitches
3 Front of the skirt
(right side of
fabric)
4 Back of the skirt
(right side of
fabric)
a
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
e
a
b
c
a
b
1 Right
2 Left
3 Needle
drop point
1 Basting
stitches
2 7 to 10 mm
(approx. 1/4
inch to 3/8
inch)
3 Reverse
stitches
4 About 5 cm ( 2
inches)
a
b
c
a
b
c
d
MAKING ADJUSTMENTS
Various Stitches
97
3
Your stitch pattern may sometimes turn out poorly,
depending on the type or thickness of fabric, the stabilizer
material used, sewing speed, etc. If your sewing does not
turn out well, sew trial stitches using the same conditions
as the real sewing, and adjust the stitch pattern as
explained below. If the stitch pattern does not turn out well
even after making adjustments based on the stitch pattern
described below, make adjustments for each stitch pattern
individually.
a
Press and select (6-284).
b
Attach monogramming foot “N” and sew the stitch
pattern.
Be sure to use monogramming foot “N”. Adjustments
may not be made correctly with any other presser foot.
c
Compare the finished stitch pattern to the illustration
of the correct stitch pattern below.
d
Press , and then adjust the stitch pattern with the
[Fine Adjust Verti.] or [Fine Adjust Horiz.] displays.
If the stitch pattern is bunched:
Press in the [Fine Adjust Verti.] display.
The displayed value increases each time the button is
pressed and the stitch pattern will lengthen.
If the stitch pattern has gaps:
Press in the [Fine Adjust Verti.] display.
The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the stitch pattern will shorten.
If the stitch pattern is skewed to the left:
Press in the [Fine Adjust Horiz.] display.
The displayed value increases each time the button is
pressed and the stitch pattern will slide to the right.
If the stitch pattern is skewed to the right:
Press in the [Fine Adjust Horiz.] display.
The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the stitch pattern will slide to the left.
e
Sew the stitch pattern again.
* If the stitch pattern still comes out poorly, make
adjustments again. Adjust until the stitch pattern
comes out correctly.
* You can sew with the setting screen on the display.
f
Press to return to the original screen.
MAKING ADJUSTMENTS
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 194.
• This adjustment can be made to (1-36 Quilting
stippling stitch), (2-21 Decorative stippling
stitch), (4-24 Eyelet stitch), (4-25 Star
eyelet stitch), (Q-15 Quilting stippling stitch)
and stitch patterns from the following categories.
MAKING STEP STITCH PATTERNS (FOR 7MM SATIN STITCH PATTERNS ONLY)
98
You can use with 7mm satin stitch patterns to
create a step effect, also called step stitch patterns.
• Press to move the stitch pattern a
distance equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to
the left or right.
• To combine the stitch patterns, refer to page 58.
Example:
a
Press so that it displays .
b
Press (9-11).
c
Press .
The next stitch pattern will move to the right.
d
Press (9-11) again.
e
Press .
The next stitch pattern will move to the left.
f
Press .
The entered stitch pattern is repeated.
MAKING STEP STITCH PATTERNS
(FOR 7MM SATIN STITCH
PATTERNS ONLY)
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Various Stitches
99
3
Saving Stitch Patterns
You can save stitch patterns that you have customized
in the machine's memory or USB media.
a
Press .
b
Press the desired destination to start saving.
1 Save to the machine’s memory.
2 Save to the USB media.
The stitch pattern is saved in a folder labeled [bPocket].
When saving the stitch pattern in a USB media, insert the
USB media into the USB port on the machine.
Retrieving Stitch Patterns
Retrieve stitch patterns saved in the machine's memory
or USB media.
a
Press the desired destination.
1 Retrieve from the machine’s memory.
2 Retrieve from a USB media.
When retrieving stitch patterns from a USB media, insert
the USB media into the USB port on the machine.
3 Retrieve via the wireless network.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
[Saving…] screen is displayed. You will lose the
stitch pattern you are saving.
21
Memo
• If the stitch pattern to be retrieved is in a folder of
the USB media, press the key for that folder. Press
to return to the previous screen.
• Folders in the USB media cannot be created with
the machine.
• Press to retrieve stitch patterns via the
wireless network. For detailed procedures, refer to
PE-DESIGN manual (Version 11 or higher).
• For details on supported file extensions, refer to
“SPECIFICATIONS” on page 192.
1 2 3
MY CUSTOM STITCH
100
b
Select the desired stitch pattern, and then press .
■ Designing a Stitch
By using the MY CUSTOM STITCH function, you can
register stitches you have created yourself. You can also
sew designs combining MY CUSTOM STITCH creations
with built-in characters (page 58).
a
Draw the stitch design on the grid.
Place points where the stitch pattern intersects with
the grid, and connect all the points with a line.
b
Determine the x and y coordinates of each of the
marked points.
Note
• When you press , the selected stitch pattern
will be deleted permanently.
MY CUSTOM STITCH
Memo
• Stitches that you create with MY CUSTOM STITCH
can be a maximum of 7 mm (approx. 9/32 inch)
wide and 37 mm (approx. 1-1/3 inches) long.
Memo
• Simplify the design so that it can be sewn as a
continuous line. For a more attractive stitch, close
the design by intersecting lines.
If the design is to be repeated and linked, the start
point and end point of the design should be at the
same height.
MY CUSTOM STITCH
Various Stitches
101
3
■ MY CUSTOM STITCH Screen
1 This area displays the stitch being created.
2 Displays the number of the present set point over the
total number of points in the stitch.
3 Displays the y-coordinate of over the x-coordinate
of .
a
Press and then .
b
Press .
c
Use to move to the coordinates of the first
point on the grid.
d
Press to add the point indicated by .
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Key Name
4 Press this key to select whether
one or three stitches will be sewn
between two points.
102
Single/triple
stitching key
5 Press this key to delete a selected
point.
—
Point delete
key
6 Press this key to exit the entering
stitch data screen.
—
Return key
7 Press this key to sew a test of the
stitch.
—
Test key
8 Press this key to store the stitch
being created.
—
MY CUSTOM
STITCH
memory key
9 Press this key to group points
together and move them together.
102
Block move
key
0 Press this key to insert new points
on the stitch design.
102
Insert key
A
Use these keys to move over
the display area, and press the set
key in the center to set a point on
the stitch design.
101-102
Arrow keys
and set key
1
B
9
8
7
2
4
6
3
5
F
A
0
D
C
E
B
Use these keys to move from
point to point on the stitch, or to
the first or last point entered on
the stitch.
102
Point-to-point
key
C Press this key to edit the utility
stitches in the machine.
—
Stitch edit key
D Press this key to change the
direction of the grid.
—
Grid direction
key
E Press this key to see an enlarged
version of the stitch being created.
—
Enlarger key
F Press this key to view an image of
the stitch.
—
Image key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Key Name
MY CUSTOM STITCH
102
e
Select whether single stitch or triple stitches will be
sewn between the first two points.
* To sew three stitches, press the key so that it appears
as .
f
Repeat the steps for each point that you have drawn on
the grid until the stitch design is drawn on the screen
as a continuous line.
g
Once you finish entering the stitch data, press to
save the stitch pattern.
■ Moving a Point
a
Press or to move to the point that you
want to move.
b
Use to move the point.
■ Moving Part or All of the Design
a
Press or to move to the first point of the
section that you want to move.
* To move to the first point, press .
* To move to the last point, press .
b
Press .
The selected point and all points that were entered
after it are selected.
c
Press or to move the section and press .
The section will be moved.
■ Inserting New Points
a
Press or to move to a place on the design
where you want to add a new point.
* To move to the first point, press .
* To move to the last point, press .
b
Press to insert a new point.
c
Use to move the point.
MY CUSTOM STITCH
Various Stitches
103
3
Retrieving Saved Stitch Patterns
a
Press .
b
Select the device to retrieve the stitch pattern from.
c
Select the stitch pattern.
* You can start sewing when this screen is displayed.
1 Stored stitch patterns
2 Edit the stitch pattern.
3 Delete the stitch pattern.
3
2
1
MY CUSTOM STITCH
104
Chapter 4
Basic Embroidery
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
106
Embroidery Step by Step
Follow the steps below to prepare the machine for
embroidery.
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED
Pointer
a
Remove the presser foot and presser foot holder.
(page 50)
b
Position the embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer
on the presser foot bar by aligning the notch of the
presser foot to the large screw.
Side view
c
Hold the embroidery foot in place with your right
hand, and then use the disc-shaped screwdriver to
securely tighten the presser foot holder screw.
1 Presser foot holder screw
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
Step # Aim Action Page
1 Presser foot
attachment
Attach embroidery foot “W+”
with LED pointer.
106
2 Checking the
needle
Use needle 75/11 for
embroidery.
48
3 Embroidery unit
attachment
Attach the embroidery unit. 107
4 Bobbin thread
setup
For the bobbin thread, wind
embroidery bobbin thread and
set it in place.
36
5 Fabric preparation Attach a stabilizer material to
the fabric, and hoop it in the
embroidery frame.
127
6 Pattern selection Turn the main power to ON,
and select an embroidery
pattern.
108
7 Embroidery frame
attachment
Attach the embroidery frame
to the embroidery unit.
130
8 Checking the
layout
Check and adjust the size and
position of the embroidery.
131
9Embroidery upper
thread setup
Set up embroidery upper
thread according to the
pattern.
42
Step 3
Step 1, 2
Step 7
Step 5
Step 4
Step 6, 8
Step 9
CAUTION
• When attaching an embroidery foot, always
press on the screen. You may
accidentally press the “Start/Stop” button and
possibly cause injury.
• Be sure to use embroidery foot “W+” with LED
pointer when doing embroidery. Using
another embroidery foot may cause the needle
to strike the embroidery foot, causing the
needle to bend or break and possibly cause
injury.
CAUTION
• Use the disc-shaped screwdriver to firmly
tighten the presser foot holder screw. If the
screw is loose, the needle may strike the
embroidery foot and possibly cause injury.
a
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
107
Basic Embroidery
4
d
Plug the connector of the embroidery foot “W+” with
LED pointer into the jack on the back left side of your
machine.
e
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and the
previous screen is displayed.
About the Embroidery Unit
■ Attaching the Embroidery Unit
a
Turn the main power to OFF, and remove the flat bed
attachment.
b
Insert the embroidery unit connection into the
machine connection port. Push lightly on the
connection port cover until the unit clicks into place.
1 Embroidery unit connection
2 Machine connection port
3 Carriage
c
Turn the main power to ON.
The following message will appear.
d
Press .
The carriage will move to the initialization position.
CAUTION
• Before attaching or removing the embroidery
unit, be sure to turn off the machine.
Otherwise, injuries may occur if one of the
operation buttons is accidentally pressed.
• Do not move the machine with the embroidery
unit attached. The embroidery unit could fall
off and cause injury.
• Keep your hands and foreign objects away
from the embroidery carriage and frame when
the machine is embroidering. Otherwise,
injuries or damage may result.
• To avoid distorting your embroidery design, do
not touch the embroidery carriage and frame
when the machine is embroidering.
• Do not push on the carriage when installing
the embroidery unit onto the machine. Moving
the carriage may damage the embroidery unit.
• Allow sufficient space around the embroidery
unit. Otherwise, the embroidery unit could fall
off foreign object, and may cause injury.
• Do not touch the embroidery carriage until the
initialization finishes.
• Be sure to turn off the power before attaching
or removing the embroidery unit. Otherwise,
the machine may be damaged.
• Do not touch the inner connector of the
embroidery unit. The pins on the embroidery
unit connection may be damaged.
• Do not apply strong force to the embroidery
unit carriage or pick up the unit by the
carriage. Otherwise, the embroidery unit may
be damaged.
• Store the embroidery unit in a safe place to
prevent damage to the unit.
• Do not carry the embroidery unit by holding
the carriage or release lever compartment.
Note
• You can also sew utility/decorative stitches with
the embroidery unit attached. Touch and
. The feed dog will automatically raise for
utility and decorative stitching.
Note
• Be sure there is no gap between the embroidery
unit and the machine. If there is a gap, the
embroidery patterns will not embroider with the
correct registration.
a
b
c
SELECTING PATTERNS
108
■ Removing the Embroidery Unit
a
Press , then press .
The carriage will move to the removal position.
b
Turn the main power to OFF.
c
Squeeze the release lever, and pull the embroidery unit
away from the machine.
■ Copyright Information
The patterns stored in the machine and patterns sold
separately are intended for private use only. Any public or
commercial use of copyrighted patterns is an infringement
of copyright law and is strictly prohibited.
■ About Embroidery Patterns
There are many character and decorative embroidery
patterns stored in the machine’s memory (see the “Quick
Reference Guide” for a full summary of patterns in the
machine’s memory or visit “ http://s.brother/cmeac/
”).
You can also use patterns sold separately.
Once the machine has finished the initialization and the
carriage has moved to the start position, the pattern
selection screen appears.
1 Embroidery patterns
2 Character patterns
3 Decorative alphabet patterns
4 Frame patterns
5 Utility embroidery patterns
6 Pattern type selection keys
7 My Design Center (page 156)
8 Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (page 150)
9 Patterns to be transferred via the wireless network
(page 150)
0 Patterns saved in USB media (page 150)
A Move the embroidery unit carriage to the storage
position.
CAUTION
• Always remove the embroidery frame before
pressing . Otherwise, the frame may strike
the embroidery foot, and possibly cause injury.
SELECTING PATTERNS
1
A
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
7
SELECTING PATTERNS
109
Basic Embroidery
4
Selecting Embroidery Patterns
a
Press the category tab and then press the pattern type
selection key or pattern key you want to embroider.
1 Pattern category tab
2 Pattern type/pattern selection key
b
Select a pattern.
* Press the category tab or
to return to the
previous screen.
The selected pattern is displayed.
c
Press to set the pattern.
* Press to darken the background color for the
pattern image with bright thread colors, to get a
clearer image.
The pattern is designated with a red box around it on
the edit screen.
d
Press to edit the selected pattern.
(page 114)
e
Press .
The embroidery screen appears.
1
2
SELECTING PATTERNS
110
f
Press to edit the pattern before
embroidering. (page 125)
* To return to the edit screen, press .
g
Start embroidering. (page 135)
Selecting Character Patterns
a
Press .
b
Press the key of the font you want to embroider.
* : View the next page.
: View the previous page.
c
Select the character category and then type in the text.
(page 111)
d
Press .
The edit screen appears.
e
Follow the steps from d to g of “Selecting
Embroidery Patterns” on page 109.
SELECTING PATTERNS
111
Basic Embroidery
4
■ Character Pattern Input Keys
Memo
• If a key display is grayed out, you cannot use that
function with the selected pattern.
No. Display Explanation
Name
1 Return to the previous screen.
Return key
2 Change the size of the character patterns.
To change the size of one character, press
to display and then select
the character. The size of the selected
character is changed.
Size key
3 Change the layout of the character patterns.
• To arrange the character patterns on an
arc, press , , or .
: Make the arc flatter.
: Make the arc rounder.
• To arrange the character patterns on an
incline, press .
: Change the incline
counterclockwise.
: Change the incline clockwise.
• : Reset the layout.
Array key
4 Change the spacing of the character
patterns.
• : Increase the character spacing.
• : Decrease the character spacing.
• To change the spacing after one character,
press to display and then
select the character. The spacing between
the selected character and the next
character is changed.
• : Move the one selected character
up.
• : Move the one selected character
down.
• : Reset the spacing.
Character
spacing key
0
9
8
A
B
C
5 76431 2
5 Switch alignment. This function is available
when multiple lines of characters are input.
• : Right alignment
• : Left alignment
• :
Center alignment
Alignment key
6 Change the font of the characters.
Depending on the font that was selected, it
may not be possible to change the font.
• To change the font of one character, press
to display and then
select the character. The font of the
selected character is changed.
Font Type key
7 Apply the character pattern editing.
Set key
8 Enter a space.
Space key
9 Make a new line.
Line feed key
0 Delete the character.
Delete key
A - Select the category of character.
Category keys
B Select to edit all characters or one character.
• : Edit all characters.
• : Edit one character.
Select one/all
key
C Move the cursor and select a character.
Character
selection keys
No. Display Explanation
Name
SELECTING PATTERNS
112
Selecting Frame Patterns
a
Press .
b
Press the key of the frame shape you want to
embroider in the top part of the screen.
Various frame patterns are displayed at the bottom
part of the screen.
1 Frame shapes
2 Frame patterns
c
Press the key of the frame pattern you want to
embroider.
The selected pattern is displayed on the screen.
d
Press .
The edit screen appears.
e
Follow the steps from d to g of “Selecting
Embroidery Patterns” on page 109.
Combining Patterns
Example:
a
Select a pattern and then press .
b
Press .
c
Press .
d
Select and enter “LOVE”.
The characters you enter will be displayed in the
center of the embroidery pattern area.
e
Press .
f
Press and then press .
g
Use to move the characters.
* Characters can also be moved by directly dragging
them with your finger or the touch pen.
1
2
SELECTING PATTERNS
113
Basic Embroidery
4
h
Press .
i
Press to change the color of the characters.
(page 122)
j
Press .
k
When all editing is finished, press .
■ Selecting a Pattern
If multiple patterns have been combined, use
to select the pattern to be edited. Patterns
can also be selected by directly touching the screen with
your finger or touch pen.
■ Selecting Multiple Patterns at the Same Time
Multiple patterns can easily be edited, for example, when
moving patterns, if they are all selected together.
a
Press .
b
Touch each pattern to be selected.
1 Press or to check the patterns to be selected,
and then press . The selected patterns are
highlighted with a red box. To deselect the selected
patterns, press .
2 Press this key to deselect all selected patterns.
3 Press this key to select all patterns in the pattern display
area.
4 Patterns can be moved with this key.
c
Press to return to the edit screen.
Each selected pattern is surrounded with a red box.
Note
• Combined patterns will be embroidered in the
order they were entered.
Memo
• You can also select multiple patterns by dragging
your finger to specify the area of selection.
Memo
• The following functions are available while multiple
patterns are selected.
-Copying
-Grouping
-Stippling
- Extracting pattern outlines
1
2
4
3
EDITING PATTERNS
114
■ Grouping Patterns
If the multiple patterns are grouped, they can be edited as
a single pattern.
a
Select patterns you want to group. (page 113)
b
Press .
The selected patterns are grouped.
* To ungroup a grouped pattern, select the grouped
pattern, and then press . At this time, multiple
patterns are selected. To cancel the multiple
selection, press any other pattern or the blank area.
1 Size of the entire combined pattern
2 Size of the pattern currently selected
3 Distance from the center of the frame to the center of the
pattern currently selected
4 Degree of rotation for the pattern currently selected
5 Color sequence and stitching times of each step of the
pattern
■ Key Functions
Using these keys, you can edit the selected pattern. Press
to display the editing window.
Memo
• The following functions are applied to all patterns in
the grouped pattern.
-Moving
-Rotating
- Appliqué
-Border
- Extracting pattern outlines
- Simple stippling
- Thread color changing
EDITING PATTERNS
Memo
• If a key display is grayed out, you cannot use that
function with the selected pattern.
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
1 Display the pattern moving
window.
• : Move the pattern in
the direction shown by the
arrow.
• : Center the pattern.
112
Move key
2
1
5
3
4
K J G FH
N
O
1
3
5
7
9
A
C
E
2
4
6
8
0
B
D
M
L
I
EDITING PATTERNS
115
Basic Embroidery
4
2 Display the pattern sizing window.
• : Decrease the pattern
proportionately.
• : Decrease the pattern
vertically.
• : Decrease the pattern
horizontally.
• : Enlarge the pattern
proportionately.
• : Stretch the pattern
vertically.
• : Stretch the pattern
horizontally.
• : Change the size of the
character patterns.
• : Reset the size. (except for
character patterns.)
• : Move the pattern in
the direction shown by the
arrow.
117
Size key
3 Display the pattern rotating
window.
• : Reset the position.
• : Move the pattern in
the direction shown by the
arrow.
You can also rotate the pattern by
dragging the red point at the
corners of the pattern.
—
Rotate key
4 Group selected multiple patterns. 114
Group key
5 Duplicate the pattern. —
Duplicate key
6 Change the pattern to a horizontal
mirror image.
—
Horizontal
mirror image
key
7 Make and edit the repeated
pattern.
117
Border key
8 Change thread density for some
alphabet character and frame
patterns. Other patterns are
available after enabling patterns to
change the density.
117
Density key
9 Change the thread color. 123
Thread palette
key
0 Create an appliqué outline of the
pattern.
141
Appliqué key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
A Separate the continuous character
patterns to adjust the spacing or
edit separately afterwards.
• : Select where the
patterns is to be separated.
• : Separate the patten. A
separated character pattern
cannot be combined again.
—
Separate key
B Edit characters. 111, 116
Letter Edit key
C Extract the outline of the pattern.
The extracted pattern can be used
with My Design Center.
171
Outline key
D Create stippling around the
pattern.
—
Stippling key
E Press this key when you want to
change the thread color, character
by character in character
embroidery. Since the machine
stops at the end of each character,
the upper thread can be changed
as you embroider.
—
Multi color key
F Proceed to the embroidery screen. —
Embroidery
key
G Save a pattern in the machine’s
memory or USB media. The
pattern can also be transferred to
a computer via a wireless network
connection.
150
Memory key
H Redo the last operation that was
undone.
—
Redo key
I Undo the last operation. —
Undo key
J Delete the selected pattern (the
pattern outlined by the red box).
—
Delete key
K Add another pattern to the editing
pattern.
112
Add key
L Select the pattern to edit when
there are multiple patterns.
113
Pattern select
key
M Make multiple patterns to be
selected at the same time.
113
Multiple
selection key
N
• : Magnify the image.
Use / / / to
scroll through the display in any
direction.
• : Demagnify the image
(minimum: 100%).
• : Select the percent of
magnification.
—
Magnify keys
O Preview the embroidery image. 116
Image key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
EDITING PATTERNS
116
■ Editing Letters
For details on input keys, refer to “Character Pattern
Input Keys” on page 111.
Previewing the Pattern
a
Press .
An image of the pattern as it will be embroidered
appears.
b
Press to select the frame used in
the preview.
* Frames displayed in gray cannot be selected.
* Press to enlarge the image of the pattern.
* The pattern can be embroidered as it appears in the
display.
c
Press to check the embroidering order.
The stitch simulator screen appears.
1 Simulation speed keys
2 Operation keys
: Start the simulation at the set speed.
: Pause the simulation.
: Stop the simulation.
* Press to return to the embroidery frame
selection screen.
d
Press .
Memo
• To edit character patterns with multiple lines in the
edit screen, ungroup the pattern. (page 114)
1
2
EDITING PATTERNS
117
Basic Embroidery
4
Changing the Size and the Density of the
Pattern
If is selected, you can change the pattern size
while maintaining the thread density. The machine
recalculates the stitch density automatically. With this
function, the pattern will be enlarged or reduced at a
larger ratio than with normal pattern resizing.
a
Select in the size window.
* : Change the pattern size while maintaining
the number of stitches. The thread density for the
pattern increases or decreases.
* : Change the pattern size while maintaining
the thread density. After the pattern size is changed,
the thread density can be changed in the edit screen.
The number of stitches is recalculated depending on
the pattern size.
b
Select the direction in which to change the pattern
size.
c
When you select in step a, press , and
then press to change the thread density.
* : Make the pattern less dense.
* : Make the pattern more dense.
d
Press .
Creating Repeated Patterns
Using the border function, you can create repeated
patterns. You can also adjust the spacing of the
patterns.
a
Press , and then press .
b
Select the direction in which the pattern will be
repeated.
* : Repeat the pattern above.
* : Repeat the pattern below.
* : Delete above pattern.
* : Delete below pattern.
Vertical direction
1 Repeating and deleting keys
2 Spacing keys
3 Key to cancel pattern repeating
Note
• This function cannot be used with alphabet
character patterns, frame patterns, repeated
patterns or buttonhole patterns.
• Patterns with a large number of stitches (100,001
or more) cannot be resized while maintaining a
thread density.
Memo
• Depending on the pattern, the size of the pattern
increases up to 200% or reduces to 60%.
• You can also change the size by dragging the red
point at the sides and corners of the pattern.
2
1
3
EDITING PATTERNS
118
Horizontal direction
1 Repeating and deleting keys
2 Spacing keys
3 Key to cancel pattern repeating
c
Adjust the spacing of the repeated pattern.
* : Widen spacing.
* : Tighten spacing.
d
Complete repeated patterns by repeating steps b
through
c.
e
Press .
■ Repeating One Element of a Repeated Pattern
You can select one element of a repeated pattern and
repeat only that single element. This function allows you
to create complex repeated patterns.
a
Press .
b
Choose the direction in which the repeated pattern will
be cut.
*
: Cut horizontally.
*
: Cut vertically.
The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
c
Use and to select the cut line.
2
1
3
EDITING PATTERNS
119
Basic Embroidery
4
d
Press .
The repeated pattern will be divided into separate
elements.
e
Press .
f
Use and to select the element to repeat.
g
Repeat the selected element.
h
Press .
■ Color Sorting Repeated Patterns
Press to automatically change the embroidering
order of colors in combined border embroidery patterns so
that the same color can be continuously embroidered.
This allows you to continue embroidering without
repeatedly changing the upper thread or changing the
embroidering order manually.
■ Assigning Thread Marks
By sewing thread marks, you can easily align patterns
when rehooping the fabric to embroider a series. When
embroidering is finished on a pattern, a thread mark in the
shape of an arrow will be sewn using the final thread.
When embroidering a series of patterns, use the point of
this arrow for positioning the following designs to be
embroidered.
a
Press .
Memo
• When a grouped pattern is repeated, the
embroidering order is changed in each pattern.
• If there are repeated patterns with other repeated
patterns or other patterns, the embroidering order
of only the repeated patterns is changed.
EDITING PATTERNS
120
b
Press .
c
Press to select the thread mark to be sewn.
d
Press .
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly
After creating the repeated pattern, rehoop the
embroidery frame and keep embroidering for the next
pattern.
a
Select the repeated pattern and assign the thread mark
at the center of the bottom of the pattern.
* Refer to “Assigning Thread Marks” on page 119.
b
Press , then .
c
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
When embroidering is finished, the thread mark is
embroidered with the last thread color.
d
Remove the embroidery frame.
e
Rehoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.
Memo
• When there are two or more elements, use or
to select an element to assign a thread
mark(s) to.
Memo
• The optional border frame allows you to easily
rehoop the fabric without removing the
embroidering frame from the machine.
Note
• Adjust the position of the fabric so that the
embroidering area for the next pattern is within the
embroidering area of the embroidery sheet.
1 Pattern embroidered first
2 Position of pattern to be embroidered next
3 Embroidering area of embroidery sheet
c
a
b
EDITING PATTERNS
121
Basic Embroidery
4
f
Attach the embroidery frame to the machine, and then
press .
g
Press to set the starting point to the center top of
the pattern.
h
Press .
i
Press , and then press .
j
Press to move the embroidery frame until the
thread mark on the fabric is aligned with the light of
the LED pointer.
* To check the needle drop point with the light of the
LED pointer, press .
k
Press .
l
Remove the thread mark.
m
Start embroidering.
Memo
• For the accurate needle drop point, slowly turn the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to lower
the needle. Then, turn the handwheel away from
you (clockwise) until the mark on the handwheel is
at the top. The carriage cannot move if the mark on
the handwheel is not at the top.
1 Mark
a
EDITING COLORS
122
Changing the Thread Color
You can change the thread color from the thread colors
assigned by the machine.
a
Press , and then press .
The thread color palette appears.
b
Press the color of the part to be changed.
* Press or to display the thread color that is
not on the screen.
The selected thread color image appears.
1 Selected thread color image
c
Select a new color from the thread color palette, and
then press .
1 Thread brand for colors
2 Thread color palette
The display shows the changed colors.
* To return to the original color, press . If
multiple colors have been changed, this command
will return all colors to their original colors.
EDITING COLORS
Memo
• When you directly touch a part of the pattern
whose color is to be changed, the part can be
selected and displayed.
1
Memo
• Press to specify a thread color by entering its
number. If you enter the wrong number, press ,
and then enter the correct number. After entering
the number, press .
2
1
EDITING COLORS
123
Basic Embroidery
4
Finding New Color Schemes with the Color
Shuffling Function
With the color shuffling function, the machine suggests
new color schemes for the embroidery pattern that you
have selected. After you select the effect ([Random],
[Vivid], [Gradient] or [Soft]), sample color schemes for
the selected effect are displayed.
a
Press , and then press .
b
Press .
c
Select the thread brand for colors and the number of
colors you want to create the pattern with.
1 Thread brand for colors
2 Number of colors to be used
d
Select the desired effect.
1 Effects for schemes
If you select [Random] or [Gradient], the color
specifying screen will appear.
If you select [Vivid] or [Soft], proceed to step
g.
e
Press to set and specify the thread
color to use in the effect.
* If you don’t need to specify the thread color, just set
to .
[Manual] setting for [Random]
You can select up to 6 colors to be used in the [Random]
effect. The effect will be created using the selected colors.
1 Select colors from the palette.
2 Selected colors are listed.
Note
• This function may not be available depending on
the pattern you select (ex. a repeated pattern,
licensed pattern).
2
1
1
1
2
EDITING COLORS
124
[Manual] setting for [Gradient]
You can select one color to be used in the [Gradient] effect.
The effect will be created with a color you select.
1 Select a color from the palette.
2 Selected color is displayed.
f
Press .
g
Select the color scheme from samples.
* Press to add the new schemes.
1 Press to review the previous schemes.
h
Select the displayed color scheme.
* : Return to the previous screen.
* or : Display the other color schemes.
* : Select the displayed color scheme.
The thread color palette screen will appear.
Thread Color Sorting
This function allows you to embroider while replacing
the thread spool a minimal number of times.
Before starting to embroider, press in the
embroidery screen to rearrange the embroidery order
and sort it by thread colors.
1
2
1
Memo
• To temporarily register your favorite schemes,
press (to release your favorite schemes, press
again). 9 color schemes can be added. Press
to check the registered favorite
schemes.
To cancel the registration, press .
Note
• Maximum 20 pages of schemes can be reviewed.
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN
125
Basic Embroidery
4
a
Press in the embroidery screen.
b
Press .
* Press again to check the sorted thread
colors.
The embroidery color order is rearranged and sorted
by thread colors.
* Press , then to cancel color sorting
and embroider with the original embroidery color
order.
* This screen appears when embroidery starts.
1 The presser foot symbol
Attach embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer or
embroidery foot “W” (sold separately) for all embroidery
projects.
2 A preview of the pattern
3 The boundary for embroidering with the selected frame
in the settings screen
4 Total number of stitches in the selected pattern and
number of stitches that have already been embroidered
5 The time necessary to embroider the pattern, and the
time already spent embroidering the pattern (not
including time for changing and automatically trimming
the thread)
6 The number of colors in the pattern, and the number of
the color currently being embroidered
7 Switch the progress bar (which shows the embroidering
progress) between showing only one color or all colors.
This key appears after starting embroidering or after
pressing the key.
8 The part of the embroidery pattern that will be
embroidered with the thread color at the top of the list
9 The order for thread color changes and the embroidering
time for each thread color
* The displayed time is the approximate time that will
be required. The actual embroidering time may be
longer than the displayed time, depending on the
embroidery frame that is used.
Note
• This function does not work on overlapping
patterns.
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY
SCREEN
9
1
2
3
7
4 5 6
8
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN
126
■ Key Functions
Using these keys, you can move or rotate pattern, etc.
Press to display the editing window.
Note
• Some operations or functions are not available for
certain patterns. If the key display is grayed out,
you cannot use that function or operation with the
selected pattern.
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
1 Turn on the light of the LED
pointer.
Press this key to check the needle
drop point with the light of the LED
pointer.
131
Needle point
check key
2 Shows the embroidery frames that
can be used for the selected
pattern.
Be sure to use the proper frame.
128
Available
frames
3 Shows the size of the selected
pattern.
—
Pattern size
4 Preview the embroidery image. 116
Image key
5 Shows the distance between the
embroidering position and the
center (when the embroidery
pattern is moved).
—
Distance
6 Shows the degree of rotation of
the pattern.
—
Degree
7 Display the pattern moving
window.
—
Move key
8 Display the pattern rotating
window.
—
Rotate key
9 Add the basting stitch around the
pattern. You can select the
distance from the pattern to the
basting stitching.
29, 140
Basting key
8
DEG F
4
0
B
1
CH
7
9
A
3
2
5
6
0 Change the setting to embroider
the pattern with a single color.
Press the key again to return to the
original setting.
Even if uninterrupted embroidering
has been set, the automatic
thread cutting function and the
thread trimming function can be
used.
The icons of the spool of thread
are grayed out.
—
Uninterrupted
embroidery
key
A Rearrange the embroidery order
and sort it by thread colors.
124
Thread color
sorting key
B Press this key to align the
embroidering position.
133
Embroidery
positioning
key
C Save the pattern to the machine’s
memory or USB media. The
pattern can also be transferred to
a computer via a wireless network
connection.
150
Memory key
D Check the position of the pattern.
• : Move the carriage to
trace the embroidery area of the
pattern. This allows you to
check that there is enough
space to embroider the pattern.
• : Move the carriage to
the selected position.
133
Trial key
E Specify the needle start position.
• : Set the needle start
position to the lower-left corner
of the pattern. This setting is
useful when connecting
patterns since it allows you to
continue embroidering until the
first stitch of the next pattern.
• : Move the carriage to
the selected position.
147, 148
Starting point
key
F Move the needle forward or back
in the pattern; useful if the thread
breaks while embroidering or if
you want to start again from the
beginning.
138
Forward/Back
key
G Set automatic thread cutting,
thread trimming or the thread
tension. For embroidery, these
functions are set automatically.
143-146
Cut/Tension
key
H Return to the edit screen. —
Return key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
PREPARING THE FABRIC
127
Basic Embroidery
4
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to
the Fabric
a
Iron the iron-on stabilizer material to the wrong side of
the fabric.
• Use a piece of stabilizer which is larger than the
embroidery frame being used.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
CAUTION
• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3
mm (approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle to
break.
Note
• When using layers with thicker batting etc., you can
embroider more attractive finishes by adjusting the
embroidery presser foot height in the embroidery
settings screen.
Press , and use and in the
[Embroidery Foot Height] in the embroidery
settings screen. Adjust the presser foot height for
thick or puffy fabrics.
• To increase the space between the embroidery foot
and the right side of the fabric, set the [Embroidery
Foot Height] to a larger number.
• In the case of thick terry cloth towels, we
recommend that you place a piece of water soluble
stabilizer on the top surface of the towel. This will
help to reduce the nap of the toweling and result in
more attractive embroidery.
CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery
when embroidering on stretch fabrics,
lightweight fabrics, fabrics with a coarse
weave, or fabrics which cause pattern
shrinkage. Otherwise, the needle may break
and cause injury.
1 Fusible side of stabilizer
2 Fabric (wrong side)
3 Size of the embroidery
frame
a
b
c
Memo
• When embroidering small pieces of fabric that
cannot be hooped in an embroidery frame, use
stabilizer material as a base. After lightly ironing the
fabric to the stabilizer material, hoop it in the
embroidery frame. If stabilizer material cannot be
ironed onto the fabric, attach it with a basting
stitch. After completing the embroidery, remove the
stabilizer material carefully.
• When embroidering on thin fabrics such as
organdy or lawn, or on napped fabrics such as
towel or corduroy, use water soluble stabilizer (sold
separately) for best results. The water soluble
stabilizer material will dissolve completely in water,
giving the project a more attractive finish.
1 Fabric
2 Stabilizer
3 Basting
a
b
c
PREPARING THE FABRIC
128
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame
■ Types of Embroidery Frames
Optional embroidery frames can be used. When choosing
frames that do not appear on the screen, be sure to check
the design size of the embroidery field of the optional
frame. Check with your authorized Brother dealer for
frame compatibility.
Select a frame that matches the pattern size. Available
frame options are displayed on the LCD.
1 Highlighted: Can be used
2 Shaded: Cannot be used
■ Inserting the Fabric
a
Lift-up and loosen the frame adjustment screw and
remove the inner frame.
1 Frame adjustment screw
2 Inner frame
b
Lay the fabric right side up on top of the outer frame.
c
Insert the inner frame making sure to align the inner
frame’s with the outer frame’s .
1 Inner frame’s
2 Outer frame’s
d
Slightly tighten the frame adjustment screw.
e
Gently smooth out the fabric. Make sure fabric is flat
and without wrinkles.
* After stretching the fabric, make sure the fabric is
taut.
* Make sure the inside and outside frames are even
before you start embroidering.
1 Outer frame
2 Inner frame
3 Fabric
Note
• If the fabric is not securely held in the embroidery
frame, the pattern will embroider out poorly. Insert
the fabric on a level surface, and gently stretch the
fabric taut in the frame.
• Embroidery frames with factory-coded stickers can
be used with the application (My Design Snap).
a
b
1 Factory-
coded
stickers
1
a
b
a
b
c
a
b
c
PREPARING THE FABRIC
129
Basic Embroidery
4
f
Tighten the frame adjustment screw to keep the fabric
from loosening while stitching.
g
Return the frame adjustment screw to its initial
position.
■ Using the Embroidery Sheet
When you want to embroider the pattern in a particular
place, use the embroidery sheet with the frame.
a
With a chalk pencil, mark the area of the fabric you
want to embroider.
1 Embroidery pattern
2 Mark
b
Place the embroidery sheet on the inner frame. Align
the guide lines on the embroidery sheet with the mark
you made on the fabric.
1 Inner frame
2 Guide line
c
Gently stretch the fabric so there are no folds or
wrinkles, and press the inner frame into the outer
frame.
1 Inner frame
2 Outer frame
d
Remove the embroidery sheet.
Memo
• You can use the disc-shaped screw driver, when
you loosen or tighten the frame adjustment screw.
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
130
a
Press (Presser foot lifter button) to raise the
presser foot.
b
Align the embroidery frame guide with the right edge
of the embroidery frame holder.
1 Embroidery frame holder
2 Embroidery frame guide
c
Slide the embroidery frame into the holder, making
sure to align the embroidery frame’s with the
holder’s .
1 Arrow mark
d
Lower the frame-securing lever to be level with the
frame to secure the embroidery frame in the
embroidery frame holder.
1 Frame-securing lever
■ Removing the Embroidery Frame
a
Press (Presser foot lifter button) to raise the
presser foot.
b
Raise the frame-securing lever.
c
Pull the embroidery frame toward you.
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY
FRAME
Note
• Wind embroidery bobbin thread and insert the
bobbin before attaching the embroidery frame.
Check that there is enough thread in the bobbin.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
131
Basic Embroidery
4
The pattern is normally positioned in the center of the
embroidery frame. If the pattern needs to be repositioned
for better placement on the garment, you can check the
layout before starting embroidery.
Checking the Needle Drop Point with the
Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer
a
Press in the embroidery screen.
The LED pointer indicates the needle drop point.
■ Adjusting the LED Pointer
Adjust the LED pointer if it indicates a point different than
the actual needle drop point. Before adjusting the LED
pointer, mark the actual needle drop point on the fabric to
be embroidered, and attach the embroidery frame.
a
Press .
The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
The embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display [Embroidery Foot with LED Pointer
Adjustment] in the embroidery setting screen.
d
Press .
The Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer
Adjustment screen appears.
1 LED pointer adjustment
e
Use or to adjust the LED pointer so that it
indicates the actual needle drop point.
f
Press to return to the original screen.
■ Adjusting the Brightness of the LED Pointer
a
Follow the steps from a to c of “Adjusting the LED
Pointer” on page 131 to display the embroidery foot
with LED pointer adjustment screen.
b
Use or to adjust the brightness of the LED
pointer.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN
POSITION
Memo
• When the LED pointer turns on, the presser foot
height is automatically adjusted according to the
fabric thickness.
• appears when the embroidery foot “W+” with
LED pointer is attached to the machine.
• If is not displayed, you cannot use the LED
pointer.
• The LED pointer turns off automatically by lowering
the presser foot or returning to the previous page.
Note
• With spongy fabric, the position may not be
accurate due to the various depths of the fabric.
• With fabric that has a very uneven surface such as
quilting, the fabric thickness may not be correctly
measured. In this case, the pointer indication
should be used only as a reference.
Note
• As a default, appears gray. After the
embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer is attached
to the machine, the key becomes available and
settings can be specified.
Note
• The specified setting is saved in the machine’s
memory. This is useful for positioning during
continuous embroidering.
• For normal use, return the setting to [00].
Memo
• In order to more accurately check the needle drop
point, turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to lower the needle.
1
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
132
Displaying a Background Image
Using a special application downloaded to a
smartphone or tablet, you can transfer a photo of the
hooped fabric to be embroidered to the machine to be
used as a background image.
The embroidery frame is displayed in the application.
You can see how the pattern will be arranged on the
actual fabric.
■ Displaying the Background Image on the
Screen of the Machine
a
Select the pattern. (page 108)
b
Photograph the fabric in the frame with the easy mode
of the application, and then transfer it to the machine.
For a detailed procedure, refer to the application.
c
Press .
* Attach the frame used in the image before pressing
.
The transferred background image appears on the
screen of the machine.
■ Calibrating the Position of the Background
Image
By calibrating the position of the background image
transferred to the machine, the pattern can be positioned
more accurately.
a
Select a pattern. (page 108)
b
Set the application to advanced mode, attach the
embroidery positioning sticker to the fabric in the
hoop, take the photo of the background, and with the
advanced mode of the application, transfer it to the
machine.
For a detailed procedure, refer to the application.
c
Press .
* Attach the frame used in the image before pressing
.
The carriage will move, and the LED pointer will turn
on.
d
Use to align the LED pointer with the center
of the larger circle in the embroidery positioning
sticker.
1 Center of the larger circle in the embroidery positioning
sticker
e
Press .
The position of the background image is calibrated.
Note
• The wireless network settings must first be
specified on the machine. Refer to “WIRELESS
NETWORK CONNECTION FUNCTIONS” on
page 33.
• Embroidery frames with factory-coded stickers can
be used with the application (My Design Snap).
Memo
• To hide the background image, press .
Press to display the background image
again.
• The transferred background image includes the
embroidery frame display.
1 Factory-
coded
stickers
1
Memo
• The position can also be calibrated by lowering the
needle with the handwheel. This method enables
more accurate positioning. Slowly turn the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to check
the needle drop point. Then, turn the handwheel
away from you (clockwise) until the mark on the
handwheel is at the top. The carriage cannot move
if the mark on the handwheel is not at the top.
1
1 Mark
a
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
133
Basic Embroidery
4
■ Aligning the Embroidering Position
a
Calibrate the position of the background image.
(page 132)
b
Press .
c
When the following message appears, press .
d
Select the position to be set as the reference point.
e
Press .
When the following message appears, press .
f
Remove the embroidery positioning sticker, and then
start embroidering.
* To remove the embroidery positioning sticker more
easily, press so that the embroidery frame
moves slightly forward and away from under the
needle. After the embroidery positioning sticker is
removed, press .
Checking the Pattern Position
The carriage moves and shows the pattern position.
Watch the embroidery frame closely to make sure the
pattern will be embroidered in the right place.
a
Press .
Memo
• The orientation of the pattern will change
depending on the orientation of the embroidery
positioning sticker.
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN
134
b
From , press the key for the position that you
want to check.
1 Selected position
The carriage will move to the selected position on
the pattern.
c
Press .
Embroidering Attractive Finishes
Many factors are involved in achieving a beautiful
embroidery result. Using the appropriate stabilizer
(page 127) and hooping the fabric in the frame
(page 128) are two important factors mentioned earlier.
Another important point is the appropriateness of the
needle and thread being used. See the explanation of
threads below. Included with this machine are two
bobbin cases. Follow the explanation below.
Bobbin case (recommended for sewing and for
embroidering with included 60 weight bobbin thread)
1 Standard bobbin case (green marking on the screw)
Standard bobbin case originally installed in the
machine has a green marking on the screw. We
recommend using the included embroidery bobbin
thread with this bobbin case. Do not adjust the tension
screw on this bobbin case with the green marked
screw.
Bobbin case (for prewound or other embroidery
bobbin threads)
1 Bobbin case (no color on the screw)
The bobbin case with no color on the screw is set with
tighter tension for embroidery with different weights of
bobbin threads and a variety of embroidery techniques.
This bobbin case is identified with a dark colored mark
on the inside of the bobbin cavity. The tension screw on
this case can be adjusted if necessary. For details, refer
to “Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin Case (with No Color
on the Screw)” on page 145.
Memo
• To see the entire embroidering area, press .
The carriage moves and shows the embroidery
area.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle is up when the carriage
is moving. If the needle is down, it could break
and result in injury.
1
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN
Thread Upper thread Use embroidery thread intended for
use with this machine.
Bobbin thread Use embroidery bobbin thread
intended for use with this machine.
Memo
• If you use threads other than those listed above,
the embroidery may not embroider out correctly.
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN
135
Basic Embroidery
4
■ Embroidery Needle Plate Cover
Under some conditions, based on the type of fabric,
stabilizer, or thread being used, there may be some
looping in the upper thread. In this case, attach the
included embroidery needle plate cover to the needle
plate. Attach the cover by inserting the two projections on
the underside of the cover into the notches on the needle
plate as shown below.
To remove the embroidery needle plate cover, place your
fingernail in the groove and lift the plate out.
Embroidering Patterns
a
Prepare embroidery threads of the colors shown on the
screen.
1 Embroidery color order
2 Cursor
b
Using the automatic needle threader, thread the
machine for the first color. (page 42)
c
Lower the presser foot, then press the “Start/Stop”
button to start embroidering.
When the first color is completely embroidered, the
machine will automatically trim the threads and stop.
The presser foot will then automatically be raised.
On the embroidery color order display, the next
color will move to the top.
CAUTION
• When embroidering on large garments
(especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do
not let the fabric hang over the table.
Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move
freely and the embroidery frame may strike the
needle, causing the needle to bend or break
and possibly cause injury.
Place the fabric so that it does not hang off the
table or hold the fabric to keep it from
dragging.
1 Groove
2 Projection
3 Notch
CAUTION
• Push the embroidery needle plate cover as far
as possible to attach it. If the embroidery
needle plate cover is not securely attached, it
may cause the needle to break.
a
b
c
Memo
• The [+] cursor moves over the pattern, showing
which part of the pattern is being embroidered.
2
1
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN
136
d
Remove the upper thread for the first color from the
machine. Thread the machine with the next color.
e
Repeat the same steps for embroidering the remaining
colors.
1 Current stitch numbers/Total stitch numbers
2 Current time/Total time
3 Part of pattern to be embroidered next
4 Embroidered colors/Total colors
When the last color is embroidered, [Finished
embroidering] will appear on the display. Press
, and the display will return to the original
screen.
Using Appliqués
When the color embroidering order display shows
[ (APPLIQUE MATERIAL)],
[ (APPLIQUE POSITION)] or
[ (APPLIQUE)], follow the procedure below.
Required materials
• Fabric for the appliqué piece
• Fabric for the appliqué base
• Stabilizer material
• Fabric glue or temporary spray adhesive
• Embroidery thread
■ 1. Creating an Appliqué Piece
a
Attach stabilizer material to the wrong side of the
fabric for the appliqué piece.
b
Sew the cutting line of the appliqué piece. Remove the
fabric for the appliqué piece from the embroidery
frame, and then carefully cut along the sewn cutting
line.
Memo
• If you want to get more attractive finishes, try the
procedures below;
- After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop” button
again to stop the machine.
- Trim the excess thread at the beginning of the
pattern. If the excess thread tail is under the
embroidery foot, raise the embroidery foot, then
trim the excess thread.
• If there is thread left over from the beginning of
embroidering, it may be embroidered over as you
continue embroidering the pattern, making it very
difficult to deal with the thread after the pattern is
finished. Trim the threads at the beginning of each
thread change.
3
4
2
1
Memo
• The thread trimming function is originally set to trim
excess thread jumps (threads linking parts of the
pattern, etc.). Depending on the type of thread and
fabric that are used, an end of upper thread may
remain on the surface of the fabric at the beginning
of the stitching. After embroidering is finished, cut
off this excess thread.
If the setting has been turned off, trim the excess
thread jumps using scissors after the pattern is
finished. Refer to page 146 for information on the
thread trimming function.
Note
• The correct names and numbers of the thread
colors to be used will not appear. Use the thread
colors depending on those in the appliqué pattern.
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN
137
Basic Embroidery
4
1 Outline of appliqué
2 Fabric for appliqué piece
■ 2. Sewing the Appliqué Position on the Base
Fabric
a
Attach stabilizer material to the wrong side of the
fabric for the appliqué base.
b
Sew the appliqué position.
c
Remove the embroidery frame from the embroidery
unit.
■ 3. Affixing the Appliqué Piece to the Base
Fabric
a
Lightly apply fabric glue or temporary spray adhesive
to the back of the appliqué piece, and then attach it to
the base fabric within the outline of the position sewn
in step
b of “2. Sewing the Appliqué Position on the
Base Fabric”.
b
After the appliqué piece is attached, attach the
embroidery frame to the machine.
Thread the machine with the embroidery thread, lower
the presser foot lever, and then press the “Start/Stop”
button to embroider the appliqué.
■ 4. Embroidering the Remainder of the Pattern
a
Change the embroidery thread according to the
embroidery color order display, and then finish
embroidering the remainder of the pattern.
Note
• If the appliqué piece is cut out along the inside of
the cutting line, it may not be correctly attached to
the fabric. Therefore, carefully cut out the appliqué
piece along the cutting line.
• After cutting out the appliqué piece, carefully
remove the thread.
1 Position of appliqué
2 Base fabric
Note
• Do not remove the base fabric from the embroidery
frame until all embroidering is finished.
a
b
a
b
Note
• If the appliqué piece cannot be attached to the
base fabric with fabric glue or temporary spray
adhesive, securely baste it in place with basting
stitches.
• If thin fabric is used for the appliqué piece,
reinforce and secure it in place with an iron-on
adhesive sheet. An iron can be used to attach the
appliqué piece to the appliqué location.
Memo
• Since glue may become attached to the presser
foot, needle or needle plate, clean off any glue after
finishing embroidering the appliqué pattern.
• For best results, trim all excess threads each time
the thread color is changed.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
138
If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin
Runs out of Thread During
Embroidering
a
Redo the upper threading or replace the bobbin.
If the upper thread breaks, stop the machine, trim the
bobbin thread, and then rethread the machine.
If the bobbin thread is almost empty or broken, press
of the displayed message, remove the embroidery
frame, and then replace the bobbin.
b
Press .
c
Press , , , or to move the needle
back the correct number of stitches before the area
where the thread broke, and then press .
• Press to restart from the beginning.
d
Lower the presser foot and press the “Start/Stop”
button to continue embroidering.
Resuming Embroidery after Turning off the
Power
The current color and stitch number are saved when
embroidery is stopped. The next time the machine is
turned on, you have the option to continue or delete the
pattern.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE
EMBROIDERY PROCESS
Note
• If [Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor] in the settings
screen of the machine is set to [OFF], the message
shown above does not appear.
Note
• It is recommended to stitch over the top of the last
two or three stitches for complete coverage.
Memo
• If you cannot move back to the spot where the
thread broke, press or
to select the color
and move to the beginning position of that color,
then use , , , or
to move ahead
to slightly before where the thread broke.
Chapter 5
Advanced Embroidery
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
140
Basting Embroidery
Before embroidering, basting stitches can be sewn
along the outline of the pattern. This is useful for
embroidering fabric that cannot have stabilizer material
affixed with an iron or adhesive. Basting stitches can be
used to attach material that cannot be hooped to
stabilizer, making it possible to be embroidered.
a
Press .
b
Use and to specify the distance from the
pattern to the basting stitching.
c
Press to return to the embroidering screen.
d
Press , and then press to select the
basting setting.
Basting is added to the beginning of the
embroidering order.
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
f
When embroidering is finished, remove the basting
stitching.
Creating an Appliqué Piece
Creating an appliqué piece is convenient for fabrics that
cannot be embroidered or when you wish to attach an
appliqué to a garment.
■ Creating an Appliqué Piece
The following pattern will be used to create an appliqué
piece.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING
FUNCTIONS
Note
• It is recommended to finish combining and editing
the pattern before selecting the basting setting. If
the pattern is edited after selecting the basting
setting, the basting and pattern may become
misaligned, and the basting under the pattern may
be difficult to remove after embroidering is
complete.
Memo
• The higher the setting, the farther the basting is
from the pattern.
• The setting remains selected even if the machine is
turned off.
Note
• When is pressed, the pattern is moved to the
center. After selecting the basting setting, move the
pattern to the desired position.
Note
• Felt or denim fabrics are recommended to make
the appliqué piece. Depending on the pattern and
fabric used, lighter weight fabrics may cause the
stitching to appear smaller.
• For best results, be sure to use stabilizer material
for embroidering.
• When making appliqué pieces, do not use the
optional border embroidery frame. Depending on
the pattern density and fabric used, shrinkage of
the stitching may occur.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
141
Advanced Embroidery
5
a
Select the pattern, and edit it if necessary.
b
Press to display the settings screen.
c
Use and to specify the distance from the
pattern to the appliqué outline.
d
Press .
e
Press and then, press to position the
satin stitching around design.
The steps for creating the appliqué piece are added
to the embroidering order.
Note
• Finish combining and editing the pattern before
selecting the appliqué setting. If the pattern is
edited after selecting the appliqué setting, the
appliqué stitching and pattern may become
misaligned.
• Since an outline is added, the pattern for an
appliqué piece (when the appliqué setting is
selected) will be larger than the original pattern.
First, adjust the size and position of the pattern as
shown below.
1 Embroidering area
2 About 1cm (1/2 inch)
3 Pattern size
a
b
c
Note
• When is pressed, the pattern is moved to the
center. After selecting the appliqué setting, move
the pattern to the desired position.
Memo
• The appliqué setting is applied only to the selected
pattern. To select multiple patterns, refer to
“Selecting Multiple Patterns at the Same Time” on
page 113.
• Three steps are added to the embroidering order:
appliqué cutting line, position of pattern placement
on the stabilizer material, and appliqué stitching.
1 Cutting line for appliqué
2 Position of pattern placement on stabilizer
material
3 Appliqué stitching
Note
• An appliqué piece cannot be created if the pattern
is too large or too complicated or a combined
pattern is separated. Even if the selected pattern
fits within the embroidering area, the entire
appliqué pattern may exceed the embroidering
area when the outline is added. If an error message
appears, select a different pattern or edit it.
1
2
3
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
142
f
Fuse or stick a piece of stabilizer to the back of the felt
or denim fabric to be used as the appliqué piece.
g
Hoop the fabric for the appliqué piece in the
embroidery frame, attach the embroidery frame to the
machine, and then start embroidering.
h
After the pattern is embroidered, thread the machine
with the thread for the cutting line, and then sew the
cutting line (APPLIQUE MATERIAL).
i
Remove the fabric for the appliqué piece from the
embroidery frame, and then carefully cut along the
stitching. After cutting, carefully remove all of the
cutting line thread.
j
Use two layers of adhesive water soluble stabilizer
material with their sticky sides together, and then hoop
them in the embroidery frame.
k
Thread the machine with the thread for the outline,
and then sew the placement line for the appliqué
position (APPLIQUE POSITION).
1 Pattern placement line
l
Use two-sided stabilizer material, and paste the
appliqué piece so that it aligns with the placement line.
m
With the machine threaded using the thread for the
outline from step
k, embroider the outline
(APPLIQUE).
n
After embroidering is finished, remove the stabilizer
material from the embroidery frame.
1 Cutting line for appliqué
Memo
• We recommend using thread for the cutting line
that is closest to the color of the fabric.
Note
• Depending on the pattern density and fabric used,
there may be shrinking of the pattern, or the
appliqué may be misaligned with the placement
line. We recommend cutting slightly outside of the
cutting line. Do not cut inside the cutting line,
otherwise the appliqué fabric will not be caught by
the appliqué stitch.
• When using patterns that are vertically and
horizontally symmetrical, use a chalk pencil to
indicate the pattern orientation before cutting it out.
a
Note
• If water soluble stabilizer is used, it is not
necessary to remove the stabilizer material after
sewing the appliqué outline. To reduce shrinkage
of the pattern, we recommend using water soluble
stabilizer.
• Put together two layers of water soluble stabilizer,
otherwise the stabilizer material may tear during
embroidering.
1 Outline of appliqué
piece
Note
• Since glue may become attached to the presser
foot, needle or needle plate, clean off any glue after
finishing embroidering the appliqué pattern.
a
a
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
143
Advanced Embroidery
5
o
Use scissors to cut the excess water soluble stabilizer
from outside the appliqué outline.
p
Soak the appliqué piece in water to dissolve the water
soluble stabilizer.
q
Dry the appliqué piece, and then iron it if necessary.
Adjusting Thread Tension
When embroidering, the thread tension should be set so
that the upper thread can slightly be seen on the wrong
side of the fabric.
The following screen appears when you press .
Note
• Do not apply a strong force when ironing,
otherwise the stitching may be damaged.
MAKING EMBROIDERY
ADJUSTMENTS
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
144
■ Correct Thread Tension
The pattern can be seen from the wrong side of the fabric.
If the thread tension is not set correctly, the pattern will
not finish well. The fabric may pucker or the thread may
break.
Follow the operations described below to adjust thread
tension according to the situation.
■ Upper Thread Is Too Tight
The tension of the upper thread is too tight, resulting in the
bobbin thread being visible from the right side of the
fabric.
Press in to weaken the upper thread
tension. (The tension number will decrease.)
■ Upper Thread Is Too Loose
The tension of the upper thread is too loose, resulting in a
loose upper thread, loose thread locks, or loops appearing
on the right side of the fabric.
Press in to tighten the upper thread tension.
(The tension number will increase.)
■ Adjusting Overall Upper Thread Tension
When embroidering, if the overall tension of the upper
thread is too tight or too loose, adjust it from the setting
screen. The selected setting will be applied to all patterns.
If an individual embroidery pattern needs additional fine
tuning, refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on page 143.
a
Press .
The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
The embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display [Embroidery Tension] in the embroidery
settings screen.
d
Use to adjust the upper thread tension.
* : Tighten the upper thread tension.
* : Loosen the upper thread tension.
e
Press .
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
Note
• If the thread tension setting is made extremely
weak, the machine may stop during embroidering.
This is not the sign of a malfunction. Increase the
thread tension slightly, and start embroidering
again.
Memo
• I
f you turn the main power to OFF or select a
different pattern, the thread tension will reset to the
automatic setting.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too tight. In this case, refer to
“Setting the Bobbin” on page 40 and rethread the
bobbin thread.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too loose. In this case, refer
to “Upper Threading” on page 42 and rethread the
upper thread.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
145
Advanced Embroidery
5
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin Case (with
No Color on the Screw)
When using the embroidery bobbin thread provided,
please be sure to choose the green marked bobbin case
when performing utility stitch sewing and embroidery
functions. When in the embroidery function mode, the
alternate bobbin case (with no color on the screw)
should be selected when substitute embroidery bobbin
threads (other than what is accompanied with your
machine) are being used. The alternate bobbin case
(with no color on the screw) can be easily adjusted
when bobbin tension changes are required to
accommodate different bobbin threads. Refer to
“Embroidering Attractive Finishes” on page 134.
To adjust the bobbin tension for embroidery function,
using the alternate bobbin case (with no color on the
screw), turn the slotted screw (-) with a (small)
screwdriver.
1 Do not turn a phillips screw (+).
2 Adjust with a screwdriver (small).
■ Correct Tension
Upper thread slightly appears on the wrong side of fabric.
■ Bobbin Thread Is Too Loose
Bobbin thread appears slightly on the right side of fabric.
If this occurs, turn the slotted screw (-) clockwise, being
careful not to over-tighten the screw, approximately 30-45
degrees to increase bobbin tension.
■ Bobbin Thread Is Too Tight
Upper thread on the right side of fabric seems to be lifting/
looping and bobbin thread is not seen on the wrong side
of fabric.
If this occurs, turn the slotted screw (-) counterclockwise,
being careful not to over-loosen the screw, approximately
30-45 degrees to decrease bobbin tension.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
a
b
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
CAUTION
• When adjusting the alternate bobbin case, be
sure to remove the bobbin from the alternate
bobbin case.
• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the alternate bobbin case as this may
result in damage to the bobbin case, rendering
it unusable.
• If the slotted screw (-) is difficult to turn, do
not use force. Turning the screw too much or
providing force in either (rotational) direction
may cause damage to the bobbin case. Should
damage occur, the bobbin case may not
maintain proper tension.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
146
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting
Function (End Color Trim)
The automatic thread cutting function will cut
the thread at the end of embroidering each color. This
function is initially turned ON. To turn this function
OFF, press and then .
* This setting returns to its default when the
machine is turned off.
a
Press .
b
Press to turn off the automatic thread cutting
function.
The key will display as . When one color
thread is embroidered, the machine will stop without
cutting the thread.
Using the Thread Trimming Function
(Jump Stitch Trim)
The thread trimming function will automatically
trim any excess thread jumps within the color. This
function is initially turned ON. To turn this function
OFF, press key and then .
* Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
1 Jump stitch
a
Press .
b
Press to turn off the thread trimming function.
The key will display as . The machine will
not trim the thread before moving to the next
stitching.
■ Selecting the Length Of Jump Stitch Not to
Trim
When the thread trimming function is turned on,
you can select the length of the jump stitch.
Select a setting from 5 mm to 50 mm in 5 mm increments.
* Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
Press or to select the length of jump stitch.
a
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
147
Advanced Embroidery
5
For example: Press to select 25 mm (1 inch) and the
machine will not trim a jump stitch of 25 mm or less
before moving to the next stitching.
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed
a
Press .
The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
The embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display [Max Embroidery Speed] in the embroidery
settings screen.
d
Use to change the maximum embroidery
speed.
Changing the Thread Color Display
You can display the name of the thread colors or
embroidery thread number.
a
Press .
The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
The embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display [Thread Color] in the embroidery settings
screen.
d
Use to display the name of the thread colors
or the embroidery thread number.
e
Use to select a thread brand.
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle
Example: Aligning the lower left side of a pattern and
the needle
Note
• If design has many trims it is recommended to
select a higher jump stitch trim setting in order to
reduce the amount of excess tails on backside of
fabric.
• The higher number of the jump stitch length
selected, the fewer number of times the machine
will trim. In this case, more jump stitches remain on
the surface of the fabric.
Memo
• SPM is the number of stitches embroidered in one
minute.
• Decrease the embroidery speed when
embroidering on thin, thick, or heavy fabrics and
when using a speciality thread like a metallic
thread.
• The setting specified before the main power is set
to OFF remains selected the next time that the
machine is turned ON.
Memo
• Colors on the screen may vary slightly from actual
spool colors.
• [Original], imported data remains the brand thread
created with the software, is set as a default.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
148
a
Mark the embroidery start position on the fabric, as
shown.
b
Press .
c
Press .
1 Start position
The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The carriage moves so that the needle is
positioned correctly.
d
Press .
e
Press and then, press .
f
Use to align the needle and the mark on the
fabric, and start embroidering the pattern.
Embroidering Linked Characters
Follow the procedure described below to embroider
linked characters in a single row when the entire
pattern extends beyond the embroidery frame.
Example: Linking “FG” to the characters “ABCDE”
a
Select the character patterns for “ABCDE”.
b
Press .
c
Press .
The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The carriage moves so that the needle is
positioned correctly. The machine is set to embroider
until the first stitch of the next character pattern (F).
d
Press .
1
Note
• To cancel the starting point setting and return the
starting point to the center of the pattern, press
or .
• Using can select a different starting point
for embroidering. However, the starting point
setting is canceled.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
149
Advanced Embroidery
5
e
Press .
f
Press to turn off the thread cutting function
and then press .
g
Start embroidering.
h
After the characters are embroidered, cut the threads
to a generous length, remove the embroidery frame,
reposition the fabric in the hoop so that the remaining
characters (“FG”) can be embroidered, and then attach
the embroidery frame.
1 End of the embroidering
i
As in step a, select the character patterns for “FG”.
j
Press .
k
Press .
The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The carriage moves so that the needle is
positioned correctly.
l
Press , then and use to align
the needle with the end of embroidering for the
previous pattern.
m
Press .
n
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start embroidering the
remaining character patterns.
a
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
150
Saving Embroidery Patterns
a
Press when the pattern you want to save is in
the embroidering screen.
b
Press the desired destination to start saving.
1 Save to the machine’s memory.
2 Save to the USB media. The pattern is saved in a folder
labeled [bPocket].
When saving the embroidery pattern in a USB media,
insert the USB media into the USB port on the machine.
3 Save the pattern via the wireless network connection.
For detailed procedures, refer to PE-DESIGN manual
(Version 11 or higher).
Retrieving Embroidery Patterns
a
Press the desired destination, and then select the
desired embroidery pattern.
1 Retrieve from the machine’s memory.
2 Retrieve from a USB media.
When retrieving the embroidery patterns from a USB
media, insert the USB media into the USB port on the
machine.
3 Retrieve the pattern via the wireless network connection.
For detailed procedures, refer to PE-DESIGN manual
(Version 11 or higher).
b
Press .
* Press to delete the embroidery pattern.
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
[Saving…] screen is displayed. You will lose the
pattern you are saving.
• Embroidery patterns cannot be transferred if the
computer and machine are connected to different
home networks. Be sure to connect to the same
home network.
1 31
2
Memo
• If the embroidery pattern to be retrieved is in a
folder of the USB media, press the key for that
folder. Press to return to the previous screen.
• You can save all or multiple data to the machine by
pressing .
• To select multiple patterns, press their thumbnails.
• : Select all patterns.
• : Deselect all patterns.
• : Save the selected patterns to the machine.
* To cancel the selection, press again.
2
1
3
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
151
Advanced Embroidery
5
Using a Frame Pattern To Make an Appliqué
■ Method 1
You can use framed patterns of the same size and shape to
create an appliqué. Embroider one pattern with a straight
stitch and one pattern with a satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern. Embroider the
pattern onto the fabric for the appliqué piece, then cut
neatly around the outside of the shape.
b
Embroider the same pattern from step a onto the
base fabric.
c
Apply two-sided stabilizer material to the back of the
fabric for the appliqué piece created in step
a. Attach
the appliqué to the base fabric matching the shapes.
d
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the same shape
as the appliqué. Embroider over the fabric for the
appliqué piece and base fabric from step c to create
the appliqué.
■ Method 2
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern, and embroider
the pattern onto the base fabric.
b
Place the fabric for the appliqué piece over the pattern
embroidered in step
a and embroider the same
pattern on the fabric for the appliqué piece.
* Be sure that the fabric for the appliqué piece
completely covers the stitched line.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
Note
• If you change the size or position of the patterns when
making an appliqué, make a note of the size and the
location.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
152
c
Remove the embroidery frame from the embroidery
unit, and cut around the outside of the stitches of the
fabric for the appliqué piece. And then, reattach the
embroidery frame to the embroidery unit.
d
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the same shape
as the appliqué and embroider the satin stitch pattern
to create an appliqué.
Embroidering Split Embroidery Patterns
Split embroidery patterns created with PE-DESIGN Ver.
7 or later, or PE-DESIGN NEXT can be embroidered.
With split embroidery patterns, embroidery patterns
larger than the embroidery frame are divided into
multiple sections, which combine to create a single
pattern after each section is embroidered.
For details on creating split embroidery patterns and for
more detailed embroidery instructions, refer to the
Instruction manual included with PE-DESIGN Ver. 7 or
later, or PE-DESIGN NEXT.
a
Insert the USB media containing the created split
embroidery pattern, and then select the split
embroidery pattern to be embroidered. (page 150)
b
Select section to be embroidered.
c
Press .
Note
• Do not remove the fabric from the embroidery
frame to cut it. Also, do not pull or push on the
fabric. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
frame.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
153
Advanced Embroidery
5
d
If necessary, press and edit the pattern.
Press to display the embroidery screen.
e
Embroider the pattern section.
f
When embroidering is finished, the following screen
appears. Press .
A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
g
Repeat steps b through f to embroider the
remaining sections of the pattern.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
154
Chapter 6
My Design Center
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER
156
With My Design Center, you can use the functions listed
below:
• Hand-drawn functions - creating embroidery patterns
by drawing on the LCD screen
• Loading functions - creating embroidery patterns by
transferring data from the application or USB media.
You can also combine patterns that you have created with
the machine’s built-in patterns.
Start My Design Center by pressing in the home
page screen or pressing in the embroidery pattern
selection screen.
1 Pattern drawing area
2 Pattern preview area
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
Memo
• The actual dimension of the pattern area is the size
of the embroidery frame, which is shown in the
pattern preview area. The pattern you drew may be
bigger than you expected. Please resize the pattern
after converting the design to the embroidery
pattern.
• When the pattern is enlarged so that only a part of
it appears in the pattern drawing area, the entire
pattern is displayed in the pattern preview area.
The red frame in the pattern preview area indicates
the part of the pattern displayed in the pattern
drawing area. Move the red frame in the pattern
preview area with the touch pen (stylus) or your
finger to display the corresponding area in the
pattern drawing area.
3
L
5 6
G
8
0
B
D
K J I H
F
1
4
2
7
9
A
C
E
My Design Center
6
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
157
■ Key Functions
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
3 Magnify the pattern. 159
Magnify key
4 Load the fabric as the
background or the picture as the
reference when creating the
pattern. You can load the image
file from the application or USB
media.
164
Load key
5 Load a line drawing, then edit and
convert it to embroidery data. You
can load a line drawing from the
application or USB media to
create the embroidery design.
165
Line design key
6 Load an image, then edit and
convert it to embroidery data. You
can load an image from the
application or USB media to
create the embroidery design.
167
Image design
key
7 Draw lines and set the color. You
can select the line type, stitch
type and color as you need.
Press to pick up the color,
line type and stitch type from a
line in the pattern within the
pattern drawing area. The picked
up color is shown as the currently
selected line color beside the
button and as the selected color
in the Line Property screen.
158
Line tool key
8 Paint with brush and set the color.
You can select the brush type, fill
type and color as you need.
Painted lines and regions will be
converted to the pattern to be
embroidered with fill stitch.
Press to pick up the color,
brush type and fill type from a
region in the pattern within the
pattern drawing area. The picked
up color is shown as the currently
selected region color beside the
button and as the selected color
in the Region Property screen.
159
Brush tool key
9 Erase lines and shapes that have
been drawn. You can select the
size/shape of the eraser.
161
Erase key
0 Select the stamp shape for
pattern drawing.
160
Stamp key
A Select a section for moving by
finger or pen, copying, deleting,
changing size and rotating lines
and shapes that have been
drawn.
161
Select key
B Cut out the selected section. —
Cut key
C Change the size of the selected
section.
169
Size key
D Rotate the selected section. —
Rotate key
E Duplicate the selected section.
The temporarily positioned
section can immediately be
rotated, enlarged, reduced or
moved.
—
Duplicate key
F Paste in the pattern drawing area
a selected section duplicated with
the duplicate key or a selected
section using the cut key.
—
Paste key
G Proceed to the stitch settings
screen.
—
Next key
H Recall image data created with
My Design Center from the
machine’s memory or the USB
media.
—
Recall key
I Store the pattern being created to
the machine’s memory or the
USB media.
—
Memory key
J Undo the last operation that was
performed and return to the
previous state. Each press of this
key will undo one operation.
—
Undo key
K Clear all the lines and shapes and
start from the beginning. The
background image is also
cleared.
—
All Clear key
L Exit from My Design Center. All
lines and shaped are erased
when you press this key.
—
Cancel key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
158
Before Creating Designs
The pattern preview displays the design smaller than
the actual size. You can view the actual pattern size by
setting the [Embroidery Frame Display].
With [Embroidery Frame Display] in the settings screen,
the embroidery frame and grid can be specified
separately.
a
Press .
The settings screen appears.
b
Press .
The embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display [Embroidery Frame Display] in the embroidery
settings screen.
d
Select the embroidery frame display.
1 Embroidery frame types
2 Grid types
Drawing Lines
a
Press and draw lines.
■ Setting the Line Types, Stitch Types and Colors
You can set or change the line types, stitch types and
colors anytime. You can also specify the line types, stitch
types and colors before drawing lines.
a
Press to set the line types, stitch types and colors.
The settings screen appears.
1 Line types
2 Stitch types
3 Line color selection: touch the color palette to activate
the drawing pen color.
Line types
Memo
• When is pressed, all regions will be displayed
in the background to clarify the drawing lines on
the screen.
1
2
Freehand line with the end open.
Freehand line closing the end automatically.
Straight line with one stroke
Straight line changing directions to the point
you select. If the end point is created near the
start point, a closed object will be created.
1
3
2
My Design Center
6
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
159
Stitch types
b
Press to return to the pattern drawing screen.
The color bar on the line tool key is changed to the
selected color.
* The appearance of the line does not change even if
the line type was changed. The specified line type
can be checked in the stitch settings screen.
1 Color bar
c
Press then press on the line to change its color.
The connected line will be changed to the selected
color.
Drawing Regions
a
Press and draw with brush.
■ Setting the Brush Types and Fill Colors
a
Press to set the brush types and fill colors.
1 Brush types
2 Fill stitch types
3 Fill color selection: touch the color palette to activate the
paint brush color.
Brush shapes/sizes
Fill stitch types
Select when you don’t want fill stitch.
Zigzag stitch
Running stitch
Triple stitch
Candlewicking stitch
Chain stitch
Line without stitch for creating a region.
Created region will be defined by the gray line.
Memo
• Press to magnify the image when you cannot
press on the line correctly.
• Press , and then select a color within the
pattern drawing area to apply the same color to
other lines or parts of the pattern.
1 Use to select the line color.
2 Press for changing the line color, and then
select the pattern to be changed.
1
1
2
Square brush
Round brush
Small brush
Medium brush
Large brush
Fill stitch
Stippling stitch
Decorative fill stitches
Displays a stitch selection screen, where
can be pressed to select a stitch.
1
3
2
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
160
b
Press to return to the pattern drawing screen.
The color bar on the brush tool key is changed to the
selected color. If a stippling stitch or decorative fill
stitch has been selected, the stitch is displayed.
1 Color bar
c
Press and press on the brush line to change color
and fill stitch type. You can also set the color and fill
stitch type of a closed region made of the line.
Using the Stamp Key
a
Press .
b
Select a stamp type and stamp shape.
1 Stamp shapes
2 Stamp types
3 Saved outlines
4 Frame embroidering areas
Stamp shapes
Stamp types (Only for Basic shapes)
* Select the outline ( ), fill stitch ( ), or outline
and fill stitch ( ) of a basic shape.
Memo
• Press to magnify the image when you cannot
press on the fill correctly.
• Press , and then select a pattern color in the
pattern drawing area to apply that fill color to other
patterns.
1 Use to select the fill color.
2 Press for changing the fill color, and then
select the pattern to be changed.
1
1
2
Basic shapes
Closed shapes
Open shapes
Outline
Fill stitch
Outline and fill stitch
3
2
4
1
My Design Center
6
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
161
Saved outlines
Frame embroidering areas
* Press to return to the pattern drawing screen.
c
Press to set the selected stamp.
The pattern drawing screen appears.
* You can change size of, rotate or move the shape
right after you create it by pressing or .
Using the Erase Key
a
Press .
b
Select the shape of the eraser.
The pattern drawing screen appears.
c
Drag along the area or line that you want to erase
while the key appears as .
Using the Select Key
You can select the part of the design to move and/or
edit. Some keys are available only after you select the
part.
a
Press .
b
Select the area you want to edit.
* To select an area you want to edit, hold the touch
pen (stylus) at a point on the screen and drag the
touch pen (stylus) to create the red box around your
selected area to be edited.
c
Edit the design with available keys. (Refer to “Key
Functions” on page 157 for the details of each key
function.)
d
Press , and then specify the stitch setting.
Embroidery pattern outlines can be registered
as stamp shapes. When registering stamp
shapes, select from the last six embroidery
patterns used. If more than six shapes are
registered, the oldest one is automatically
erased. For details on registering a stamp
shape, refer to “Decorative Stitching around a
Pattern in Embroidery (a Quilting Function)” on
page 171.
Select an embroidering area in order to
arrange the pattern to fit an embroidery frame.
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
162
Before creating the embroidery pattern, specify the stitch
settings. Lines of the design are embroidered with various
stitches and regions are embroidered with fill stitches or
stippling stitches. Stitching of the regions was already
selected in “Drawing Regions” on page 159, so specify
values of detailed settings.
After specifying the settings, press to create the
embroidery pattern.
Specifying Individual Stitch Settings
Select a pattern in the stitch settings screen to specify its
line and region stitch settings. If multiple patterns are
selected, the settings are applied to those patterns.
■ Line Settings
1 Shows the stitch type and color for the selected line.
2 Shows the stitch settings for the selected line.
Line stitch settings
Select the type of stitching you want applied to your line
art, from zigzag stitch ( ), running stitch ( ), triple
stitch ( ), candlewicking stitch ( ) or chain stitch
().
Zigzag stitch
Running stitch /Triple stitch
* Both includes an under sewing.
Candlewicking Stitch
Chain stitch
■ Region Settings
1 Shows the stitch type and color for the selected region.
2 Shows the stitch settings for the selected region.
Fill stitch settings
Stippling stitch settings
Decorative fill stitch settings
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
Zigzag width
Specifies the width of the stitch.
Density
Specifies the density of the stitch.
Run pitch
Specifies the length of the stitch.
1
2
Size
Increases/reduces the size of the stitch.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing of the stitch.
Size
Increases/reduces the size of the stitch.
Repetition
Sets repeated embroidering at the same
part.
Direction
Specifies the embroidering direction. Select
to change to the desired direction of
fill stitch.
Density
Specifies the stitch density of fill stitch.
Pull
compensation
Specifies to correct the shrinkage of the
pattern by slightly shortening or lengthening
the stitching. Change the setting after you
embroider the pattern and can check the
shrinkage.
Under
sewing
Select if you need or do not need the under
sewing for the stabilized fabric.
Run pitch
Specifies the length of a stitch of the
stippling stitch.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing between the stitches
when embroidering the stippling stitch.
Distance Specifies the offset from the pattern outline.
Size
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
Direction
Specifies the rotation angle of the pattern.
Outline
Select whether [ON] or [OFF] the outline is
also converted to embroidery data. If [ON] is
selected, the number of thread jumps can be
reduced.
1
2
My Design Center
6
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
163
a
Use to select the line or region to be changed.
Each press of moves the highlighting of the
selected pattern in order.
b
Select the setting to be changed, and then change the
setting in the screen that appears. (In this example, the
embroidering direction will be changed.)
The setting screen appears.
c
Press , and then use to change the
direction.
d
Press to apply the setting.
* appears on the tab for settings that were
changed.
* Change other settings in the same way.
Specifying Global Stitch Settings
The same stitch settings can be changed at the same
time for multiple patterns of the same type.
a
Use
to select the stitch whose settings are to
be changed, and then press .
The same stitch type lines or regions will be selected
at the same time.
b
Follow steps b through d in “Specifying Individual
Stitch Settings” on page 162 to change the settings.
c
Press to create the embroidery pattern.
When the following message appears, press .
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
164
d
Press to display the pattern editing screen.
When the following message appears, press .
1 : Check an enlarged view of the pattern.
2 : Save the embroidery data.
Loading the Background Image
Prepare the data file of your favorite picture so that you
can create an embroidery pattern. Load the image file
from the application or a USB media.
a
Press .
b
Select the device you saved the data to.
c
Select the data, and then press .
d
The selected image is displayed transparently in the
pattern drawing area.
1
2
My Design Center
6
LINE CONVERSION
165
e
Using the included touch pen (stylus), press , and
then draw lines to trace the image.
* For details on drawing lines, refer to “Drawing
Lines” on page 158.
1 Transparency adjustment
* Press or to adjust the transparency of the
background.
Each press of lightens the background, making
the line pattern darker. Each press of darkens
the background, making the line pattern lighter.
f
After editing the pattern, press to specify the
settings for pattern.
g
Press to create the embroidery pattern.
Custom patterns can be created from drawings. You can
create patterns by loading an image on the application or a
USB media.
Recommended line drawings for Line Conversion
• Line drawings must be drawn clearly using lines with
approximately 1 mm thickness.
• Line drawings should be drawn in a strong contrast.
• If the lines are too short or gathered too densely, they
will not be loaded correctly.
Create a Pattern with Line Conversion
a
Press .
The image display screen appears.
1
LINE CONVERSION
Note
• For details on creating patterns using color
illustrations, refer to “ILLUSTRATION
CONVERSION” on page 167.
• If you cannot convert the drawings as expected,
you can edit the design in My Design Center. Refer
to “PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN” on page 156.
• Line drawings are converted without recognizing
the thickness of lines. If you want to change the
thickness of lines, specify in the settings screen.
Refer to “STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN” on
page 162.
• Line drawings are converted as black lines. If you
want to change the colors, specify in My Design
Center. Refer to “Drawing Lines” on page 158.
LINE CONVERSION
166
b
Select the device you saved the data to.
c
Select the data, and then press .
d
When loading is finished, specify the [Gray-Scale
Detection level] on the screen if necessary.
The [Gray-Scale Detection level] can change the black
and white threshold for the image.
* If you do not know how the settings should be
changed, first continue the operation without
specifying settings and check the results.
* To stop loading and return to the screen in step
b,
press . The loaded image will be deleted
when you return to the previous screen.
e
Move to frame the image for the pattern.
f
Press .
The screen for confirming the converted image
appears.
g
In the screen for confirming the converted image, you
can adjust the [Gray-Scale Detection level] again, if
necessary.
1 The settings for the lines to be embroidered appear.
* If you do not know how the settings should be
changed, first continue the operation without
specifying settings and check the results.
* : Enlarge the image.
* : Display the image before being
converted. Compare the images before and after
being converted, and then change the settings if
necessary.
* : Return to the previous screen.
After changes to the settings for [Gray-Scale
Detection level] are applied, changes to
. Press to check that the image is as
desired.
h
Press .
The pattern drawing screen appears.
i
If necessary, edit the loaded image.
* After the loaded image is converted to stitching, it
appears as a background in the pattern drawing
screen. Use gauge 1 to adjust the transparency of
the background. Each press of lightens the
background, making the line pattern darker. Each
press of darkens the background, making the
line pattern lighter.
1
1
My Design Center
6
ILLUSTRATION CONVERSION
167
Custom patterns can be created from color illustrations.
You can create patterns by loading an image on the
application or a USB media.
Recommended illustrations for Illustration Conversion
• Illustrations that are clearly drawn, with no
gradation, fading or blurriness.
• Illustrations that are at least a 5 mm square
• Illustrations that are extremely simple images
Create a Pattern with Illustration Conversion
a
Press .
The image display screen appears.
b
Select the device you saved the data to.
c
Select the data, and then press .
d
When loading is finished, specify the necessary settings
in the loaded image confirmation screen.
Change the settings to adjust the image so it can easily
be converted to the desired pattern.
* To stop loading and return to the screen in step
b ,
press .
ILLUSTRATION CONVERSION
1 [Max. Number of
Colors]
The number of colors in an image will
be reduced less than the number
specified here, and then the outline
will be extracted.
2 [Remove Background] Select whether or not the
background color will be included as
one of the colors.
3 [Line] Select whether or not the outline will
be detected as a line. A thick outline
can also be detected as a region.
When detected as a line, the line
thickness and color can be specified.
3
2
1
ILLUSTRATION CONVERSION
168
e
Move to frame the image for the pattern.
f
Press .
The screen for confirming the converted image
appears.
g
In the screen for confirming the converted image,
adjust the image as necessary as in step
d.
* : Enlarge the image.
* : Display the image before being
converted. Compare the images before and after
being converted, and then change the settings if
necessary.
* : Return to the previous screen.
After changes to the settings described above have
been applied, changes to . Press
to check that the image is as desired.
h
Press .
The pattern drawing screen appears.
i
If necessary, edit the loaded image.
* After the loaded image is converted to stitching, it
appears as a background in the pattern drawing
screen. Use gauge 1 to adjust the transparency of
the background. Each press of lightens the
background, making the illustration pattern darker.
Each press of darkens the background, making
the illustration pattern lighter.
Memo
• Press to detect the outline.
Line thickness can be specified from 1.0 mm (1/16
inch) to 5.0 mm (3/16 inch).
• Press to select the outline color. Select by
touching the color, or moving icon using
in the color selection screen.
1
My Design Center
6
STIPPLING
169
Basic Stippling with My Design Center
Create a stippling design with the basic procedure.
Example:
a
Press .
* You can also start the function by pressing
in the embroidery pattern selection screen.
b
Press .
c
Select the square shape, and then press .
d
Press .
e
Select the heart shape, and then press .
f
Press .
STIPPLING
Note
• You can load a line drawing to create a stippling
stitch or use image design function of a fabric
pattern and incorporate the stippling stitch.
STIPPLING
170
g
Press until the heart shape fits in the square
shape, and then press .
h
Press , and then press .
i
Press , and then select the stitch color. Press
after setting the color.
j
Select the region you want to set stippling effect.
1 Select this region.
k
Press .
l
Adjust the stippling stitch settings to create the desired
effect, and then press .
* For details, refer to “Specifying Individual Stitch
Settings” on page 162.
When the following message appears, press .
1
My Design Center
6
STIPPLING
171
m
Press to convert into embroidery.
When the following message appears, press .
n
Follow the procedure described on “EDITING
PATTERNS” on page 114 to edit the pattern as desired.
Decorative Stitching around a Pattern in
Embroidery (a Quilting Function)
A quilt can be created with stippling stitch around an
embroidery pattern.
a
Hoop the top layer of fabric in the embroidery frame,
and then attach the frame to the machine.
b
Press in the home page screen and select the
pattern that decorative stitching will be added around,
and then press in the embroidery edit screen.
The outline of the pattern is displayed.
c
Set the distance and press .
A message appears, and the pattern outline is
registered as a stamp shape in My Design Center.
Press .
Memo
• For best results, reduce the embroidery speed.
(page 29)
STIPPLING
172
d
Press to continue to the embroidery screen,
and then embroider the pattern at the center.
e
Remove the embroidery frame from the carriage.
f
Photograph the embroidery frame with the application.
g
Attach the embroidery frame to the carriage again.
h
Place the batting and bottom layer of fabric under the
embroidery frame.
i
Press in the home page screen to start My
Design Center.
j
Press to load the embroidered fabric. Refer to
“Loading the Background Image” on page 164 for
details.
k
Press , press to recall the stamp shape
registered in step
c, and then arrange it over the
loaded pattern.
l
Use a stamp or rectangular frame to determine the
region to be stitched.
m
Use the brush tool keys to select the stitch and color of
the decorative stitching.
n
Fill the region to be stitched outside of the stamp shape
outline.
Note
• If the region is to be drawn by hand, be sure to
draw a completely closed shape. If the region is not
closed, it will not be correctly closed with any of
the fill stitches.
My Design Center
6
STIPPLING
173
o
Set the line type for the frame and pattern to , and
then press .
* Stitch settings can be adjusted in the stitch settings
screen. For details, refer to “STITCH SETTINGS
SCREEN” on page 162.
p
Specify the stitch spacing and length in the stitch
settings screen, and then press .
Check the pattern, and then press .
q
Embroider the stippling stitch around the embroidery
pattern.
STIPPLING
174
Chapter 7
Appendix
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
176
If the surface of the machine is dirty, lightly soak a cloth
in neutral detergent, squeeze it out firmly, and then
wipe the surface of the machine. After cleaning it once
with a damp cloth, wipe it again with a dry cloth.
If the screen is dirty, gently wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Do not wipe the LCD screen with a damp cloth. Do not
use organic solvents or detergents.
Restrictions on Oiling
In order to prevent damaging this machine, it must not
be oiled by the user. This machine was manufactured
with the necessary amount of oil applied to ensure
correct operation, making periodic oiling unnecessary.
If problems occur, such as difficulty turning the
handwheel or an unusual noise, immediately stop using
the machine, and contact your authorized Brother
dealer or the nearest Brother authorized service center.
Precautions on Storing the Machine
Do not store the machine in any of the locations
described below, otherwise damage to the machine
may result, for example, rust caused by condensation.
* Exposed to extremely high temperatures
* Exposed to extremely low temperatures
* Exposed to extreme temperature changes
* Exposed to high humidity or steam
* Near a flame, heater or air conditioner
* Outdoors or exposed to direct sunlight
* Exposed to extremely dusty or oily environments
Cleaning the Race
a
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle.
b
Turn the main power to OFF.
c
Remove the needle, presser foot and presser foot
holder (page 48, page 50).
d
Remove the bobbin cover.
e
Slide the needle plate cover toward you to remove it.
f
Grasp the bobbin case, and then gently lift out.
g
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint and dust from the race and bobbin thread
sensor and the surrounding area.
1 Cleaning brush
2 Race
3 Bobbin thread sensor
h
Insert the bobbin case so that the mark on the
bobbin case aligns with the
● mark on the machine.
* Align the and ● marks.
1 mark
2
● mark
3 Bobbin case
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the machine before cleaning
it. Otherwise, electric shock or injury may
result.
Note
• In order to extend the life of this machine,
periodically turn it on and use it. Storing this
machine for an extended period of time without
using it may reduce its efficiency.
Note
• If the flat bed attachment is attached, the needle
plate can be removed when the accessory
compartment is opened.
Note
• Do not apply oil to the bobbin case.
• If lint or dust collects on the bobbin thread sensor,
the sensor may not operate correctly.
a
b
c
a
b
a
b
c
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
177
Appendix
7
* Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
i
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover into the
needle plate, and then slide the cover back on.
j
Reattach the bobbin cover.
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area
The cutter below the needle plate should be cleaned. If
dust or lint accumulate on the cutter, it will be difficult
to cut the thread when (Thread cutter button) is
pressed or the automatic thread cutting function is used.
Clean the cutter when the thread is not easily cut.
a
Follow steps a through e in “Cleaning the Race” to
remove the needle plate cover.
b
Use the screwdriver included with the machine to
unscrew and remove the needle plate.
c
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint and dust from the cutter in the bobbin case
area.
1 Cutter
d
Align the two screw holes in the needle plate with the
two holes at the needle plate mounting base, and then
fit the needle plate onto the machine.
e
Lightly finger-tighten the screw on the right side of the
needle plate. Then, use the screwdriver included to
firmly tighten the screw on the left side. Finally, firmly
tighten the screw on the right side.
f
Replace the bobbin case and the needle plate cover
following steps
h through j in “Cleaning the Race”.
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning
If the screen does not respond correctly when you
touch a key (the machine does not perform the
operation or performs a different operation), follow the
steps below to make the proper adjustments.
a
Holding your finger on the screen, turn the main
power switch to OFF and back to ON.
The touch panel adjustment screen appears.
CAUTION
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched,
otherwise the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break or machine
performance may suffer. For a new bobbin
case, contact your nearest Brother authorized
service center.
• Be sure that the bobbin case is correctly
installed, otherwise the needle may break.
a
CAUTION
• Do not touch the cutter, otherwise injuries
may result.
Note
• If the needle plate has been removed, check
machine operations to confirm that installation has
been completed correctly. Refer to “Checking
Machine Operations” on page 181.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
TROUBLESHOOTING
178
b
Using the included touch pen, lightly touch the center
of each +, in order from 1 to 13.
c
Turn the main power to OFF, then turn it back to ON.
If the machine stops operating correctly, check the
following possible problems before requesting service.
You can solve most problems by yourself. If you need
additional help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the
latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Visit us at “ http://s.brother/cpeaa/
”.
If the problem persists, contact your authorized Brother
dealer or the nearest Brother authorized service center.
Frequent Troubleshooting Topics
Detailed causes and remedies for common
troubleshooting topics are described below. Be sure to
refer to this before contacting your authorized Brother
dealer.
Upper Thread is Too Tight
■ Symptom
* The upper thread appears as a single continuous
line.
* The bobbin thread is visible from the right side of
the fabric. (Refer to the illustration below.)
* The upper thread has tightened up, and comes out
when pulled.
* The upper thread has tightened up, and wrinkles
appear in the fabric.
* The upper thread tension is tight, and the results do
not change even after the thread tension is adjusted.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Bobbin thread visible from right side of fabric
3 Upper thread
4 Right side of fabric
5 Bobbin thread
Note
• Only use the included touch pen to touch the
screen. Do not use a mechanical pencil, pin, or
other sharp object. Do not press too hard on the
screen. Otherwise, damage may result.
Note
• If you finish the screen adjustment and the screen
still does not respond, or if you cannot do the
adjustment, contact your authorized Brother
dealer.
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Upper Thread is Too Tight
page 17
8
■ Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of
Fabric
page 17
9
■ Incorrect Thread Tension
page 17
9
■ Fabric is Caught in the Machine and
Cannot Be Removed
page 18
0
■ Untangling Thread from beneath the
Bobbin Winder Seat
page 18
2
a
b
c
d
e
TROUBLESHOOTING
179
Appendix
7
■ Cause
Incorrect bobbin threading
If the bobbin thread is incorrectly threaded, instead of the
appropriate tension being applied to the bobbin thread, it
is pulled through the fabric when the upper thread is
pulled up. For this reason, the thread is visible from the
right side of the fabric.
■ Remedy
Correctly install the bobbin thread. (page 40)
Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric
■ Symptom
* The thread becomes tangled on the wrong side of
the fabric.
* After starting sewing, a rattling noise is made and
sewing cannot continue.
* Looking under the fabric, there is tangled thread in
the bobbin case.
■ Cause
Incorrect upper threading
If the upper thread is incorrectly threaded, the upper
thread passed through the fabric cannot be firmly pulled
up and the upper thread becomes tangled in the bobbin
case, causing a rattling noise.
■ Remedy
Remove the tangled thread, and then correct the upper
threading.
a
Remove the tangled thread. If it cannot be removed,
cut the thread with scissors.
* Refer to “Cleaning the Race” on page 176.
b
Remove the upper thread from the machine.
c
Correct the upper threading by following the
instructions in “Upper Threading” on page 42.
* If the bobbin was removed from the bobbin case,
refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on page 40 to correctly
install the bobbin.
Incorrect Thread Tension
■ Symptoms
• Symptom 1: The bobbin thread is visible from the
right side of the fabric.
• Symptom 2: The upper thread appears as a straight
line on the right side of the fabric.
• Symptom 3: The upper thread is visible from the
wrong side of the fabric.
• Symptom 4: The bobbin thread appears as a straight
line on the wrong side of the fabric.
• Symptom 5: The stitching on the wrong side of the
fabric is loose or has slack.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Bobbin thread visible on right side of fabric
3 Upper thread
4 Right side of fabric
5 Bobbin thread
6 Upper thread visible from wrong side of fabric
■ Cause/Remedy
Cause 1
The machine is not correctly threaded.
<With symptoms 1 and 2 described above>
The bobbin threading is incorrect.
Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Upper
Thread is Too Tight” on page 178.
<With symptoms 3 through 5 described above>
The upper threading is incorrect.
Adjust the upper thread tension and then refer to “Tangled
Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric” on page 179 to correct
the upper threading.
Cause 2
A needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not
being used.
The machine needle that should be used depends on the
type of fabric sewn and the thread thickness.
If a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not
being used, the thread tension will not be adjusted
correctly, causing wrinkles in the fabric or skipped
stitches.
* Refer to “FABRIC/THREAD/NEEDLE
COMBINATIONS” on page 49 to check that a
needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are
being used.
Cause 3
An appropriate upper tension is not selected.
Select an appropriate thread tension. Refer to “Setting the
Thread Tension” on page 62.
The appropriate thread tension differs according to the
type of fabric and thread being used.
Symptom 1 Symptom 3
a
b
c
d
e
a
c
d
e
f
TROUBLESHOOTING
180
* Adjust the thread tension while test sewing on a
piece of scrap fabric that is the same as that used in
your project.
* When the bobbin thread is visible on the right side of
the fabric.
Set the upper thread tension to a lower number. (Loosen
the thread tension.)
* When the upper thread is visible on the wrong side of
the fabric.
Set the upper thread tension to a higher number.
(Tighten the thread tension.)
Fabric is Caught in the Machine and Cannot
Be Removed
If the fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be
removed, the thread may have become tangled under
the needle plate. Follow the procedure described below
to remove the fabric from the machine. If the operation
cannot be completed according to the procedure,
instead of attempting to complete it forcefully, contact
your nearest Brother authorized service center.
■ Removing the Fabric From the Machine
a
Immediately stop the machine.
b
Turn off the machine.
c
Remove the needle.
If the needle is lowered into the fabric, turn the
handwheel away from you (clockwise) to raise the
needle out of the fabric, and then remove the needle.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 48.
d
Remove the presser foot and presser foot holder.
If the thread is entangled on the presser foot, remove the
entangled thread, and then raise the presser foot lever to
remove the presser foot. Otherwise, the presser foot may
be damaged.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on
page 50.
e
Lift up the fabric and cut the threads below it.
If the fabric can be removed, remove it.
f
Remove the needle plate cover.
* Refer to “Cleaning the Race” on page 176.
g
Cut out the tangled threads, and then remove the
bobbin.
h
Remove the bobbin case.
If threads remain in the bobbin case, remove them.
i
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint or dust from the race and its surrounding area.
j
Use the disc-shaped screwdriver to loosen the two
screws on the needle plate.
Note
• If the upper threading and bobbin threading are
incorrect, the thread tension cannot be adjusted
correctly. Check the upper threading and bobbin
threading first, and then adjust the thread tension.
1 Cleaning brush
2 Race
If the fabric could be removed
Continue with step
p.
If the fabric could not be removed
Continue with step
j.
Note
• Compressed can air is not recommended to be
used.
Note
• Be careful not to drop the removed screws in the
machine.
a
b
TROUBLESHOOTING
181
Appendix
7
k
Slightly lift up the needle plate, cut any tangled
threads, and then remove the needle plate.
Remove the fabric and threads from the needle plate.
l
Remove any threads in the race and around the feed
dogs.
m
Turn the handwheel to raise the feed dogs.
n
Align the two screw holes in the needle plate with the
two holes at the needle plate mounting base, and then
fit the needle plate onto the machine.
o
Lightly finger-tighten the screw on the right side of the
needle plate. Then, use the disc-shaped screwdriver to
firmly tighten the screw on the left side. Finally, firmly
tighten the screw on the right side.
p
Replace the bobbin case and the needle plate cover
following steps
h through j in “Cleaning the Race”.
q
Check the condition of the needle, and then install it.
If the needle is in a poor condition, for example, if it is
bent, be sure to install a new needle.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 48.
■ Checking Machine Operations
If the needle plate has been removed, check machine
operations to confirm that installation has been completed
correctly.
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Select .
c
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), and look from all sides to check
that the needle falls at the center of the opening in the
needle plate.
If the needle contacts the needle plate, remove the
needle plate, and then install it again, starting with step
m in “Removing the Fabric From the Machine” on
page 180.
d
Select zigzag stitch . At this time, increase the
stitch length and width to their maximum settings.
e
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the needle bar and
feed dogs operate correctly.
Turn the handwheel to check that the feed dogs move
smoothly and do not contact the edges of the slots in the
needle plate.
1 Correct position of feed dogs
2 Incorrect position of feed dogs
f
Turn off the machine, and then install the presser foot
holder, presser foot and bobbin.
Never use a scratched or damaged presser foot.
Otherwise, the needle may break, or machine
performance may suffer.
* Refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on page 40 and
“CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on page 50.
g
Correctly thread the machine.
* For details on the machine, refer to “UPPER
THREADING” on page 42.
h
Perform trial sewing with normal fabric.
Note
• If the fabric cannot be removed, even after
completing these steps, contact your nearest
Brother authorized service center.
Memo
• Since the needle may have been damaged when
the fabric was caught in the machine, we
recommend replacing it with a new one.
Note
• Do not yet install the presser foot and thread.
1 Opening in the needle
plate
2 Handwheel
Memo
• If the needle or feed dogs contact the needle plate,
the machine may be malfunctioning; therefore,
contact your nearest Brother authorized service
center.
Note
• Incorrect sewing may be the result of incorrect
upper threading or sewing thin fabrics. If there are
poor results from the trial sewing, check the upper
threading or the type of fabric being used.
a
b
a
b
TROUBLESHOOTING
182
Untangling Thread from beneath the Bobbin
Winder Seat
If the bobbin winding starts when the thread is not passed
through the pretension disk correctly, the thread may
become tangled beneath the bobbin winder seat.
Wind off the thread according to the following procedure.
a
Press to stop the bobbin winding.
b
Cut the thread with scissors near the pretension disk.
1 Pretension disk
c
Push the bobbin winder switch to the right, and then
raise the bobbin at least 10 cm (4 inches) from the
shaft.
d
Cut the thread near the bobbin to completely remove
the bobbin from the shaft. Hold the thread end with
your left hand, and wind off the thread clockwise from
under the bobbin winder seat with your right hand as
shown below.
List of Symptoms
Check the following possible problems before requesting
service. If the reference page is “*”, contact your
authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
■ Getting Ready
1 Thread
2 Bobbin winder seat
CAUTION
• Do not remove the bobbin winder seat even if
the thread becomes tangled under the bobbin
winder seat. It may result in injuries.
a
b
a
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Cannot thread the needle.
Needle is not in the correct position.
• Press (Needle position button) to raise
the needle.
13
Needle is installed incorrectly. 48
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 48
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
The needle threader hook is bent and does not
pass through the eye of the needle.
*
The needle threader lever cannot be moved or
returned to its original position.
*
A size 65/9 needle is being used.
• The needle is incompatible with the needle
threader. Manually pass the thread through the
eye of the needle.
43
Cannot lower the presser foot with the presser foot
lever.
Presser foot was raised using (Presser foot
lifter button).
• Press (Presser foot lifter button) to lower
the presser foot.
13
Bobbin thread does not wind neatly on the bobbin.
The thread is not passed through the bobbin
winding thread guide correctly.
37
Bobbin spins slowly. 38
The thread that was pulled out was not wound
onto the bobbin correctly.
37
The empty bobbin was not set on the pin
properly.
36
While winding the bobbin, the bobbin thread was
wound below the bobbin winder seat.
You have not wound the bobbin thread properly
when you initially wound thread on the bobbin.
Ensure that the bobbin thread was properly set in
the guides.
36
TROUBLESHOOTING
183
Appendix
7
■ While Operating
The bobbin thread cannot be pulled up.
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 48
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 40
Machine does not operate
All keys and buttons have been locked by .
48, 50
Nothing appears in the LCD.
Main power switch is not turned on.
22
The plug of the power cord is not inserted into an
electrical outlet.
22
The LCD screen does not look very clear.
The brightness of the screen is not adjusted. 28
Nothing happens, even if the LCD display is pressed
Adjust the screen.
177
The screen has been locked.
• Press either of the following keys to unlock the
screen.
—
The LCD screen is fogged up.
Condensation has formed on the LCD screen.
• After a while, the cloudiness will disappear.
—
Embroidery unit does not operate.
Embroidery unit is not attached correctly.
107
Embroidery frame was attached before the unit
was initialized.
107
Pointer of the embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer
does not indicate the position correctly
With thick elastic fabric, the position will be
misaligned only at raised parts in the fabric.
131
With fabric having a very uneven surface, the
position is not correctly aligned.
• The pointer indication should be used only as a
reference.
—
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Machine does not operate.
“Start/Stop” button was not pressed.
13
Presser foot is not lowered.
13
“Start/Stop” button was pressed with the foot
controller attached.
58
The “Start/Stop” button was pressed while the
machine is set for the sewing speed controller to
control the zigzag stitch width.
27, 58
Needle breaks.
Needle is installed incorrectly. 48
Needle clamp screw is not tightened. 48
Needle is turned or bent. 48
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
49
Wrong presser foot.
194
Upper thread tension is too tight. 62, 143
Fabric is pulled during sewing. —
Spool cap is set incorrectly. 42
There are scratches around the opening in the
needle plate.
* There is a notch on the left side of the opening
in the needle plate. This is not a scratch.
*
There are scratches around the opening in the
presser foot.
*
There are scratches on the bobbin case. *
Needle is defective. 48
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not being used.
36
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 40
Presser foot is attached incorrectly. 50
Screw of the presser foot holder is loose. 50
Fabric is too thick. 69
Fabric is fed forcefully when sewing thick fabric
or thick seams.
69
Stitch length is too short. 62
Stabilizer is not attached to fabric being
embroidered.
127
1 Notch
a
TROUBLESHOOTING
184
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. 36
Upper thread breaks.
Machine is not threaded correctly (used the
wrong spool cap, spool cap is loose, the thread
did not catch the needle bar threader, etc.)
42
Knotted or tangled thread is being used.
—
The selected needle is not appropriate for the
thread being used.
49
Upper thread tension is too tight. 62, 143
Thread is twisted.
—
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 48
Needle is installed incorrectly. 48
There are scratches around the opening of the
needle plate.
* There is a notch on the left side of the opening
in the needle plate. This is not a scratch.
*
There are scratches around the opening in the
presser foot.
*
There are scratches on the bobbin case. *
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
49
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not being used.
36
Thread is weak, dry rotted, or of poor quality. —
The thread is tangled on the wrong side of the fabric.
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
49
The upper thread is too tight.
The bobbin thread is incorrectly installed. 40
Bobbin thread breaks.
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 40
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. 36
There are scratches on the bobbin or it doesn’t
rotate properly.
40
Thread is twisted.
—
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
1 Notch
a
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not being used.
36
Fabric puckers.
There is a mistake in the upper or bobbin
threading.
40, 42
Spool cap is set incorrectly. 42
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
49
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 48
Stitches are too long when sewing thin fabrics. 62
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 62, 143
Wrong presser foot. 194
Fabric and stabilizer are not taut in the
embroidery frame.
128
Incorrect or insufficient stabilizer is being used. 127
The stitch is not sewn correctly.
The presser foot that is used is not appropriate
for the type of stitch that you wish to sew.
194
The thread tension is incorrect. 62
The thread is tangled, for example, in the bobbin
case.
176
Skipped stitches
Machine is threaded incorrectly. 42
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
49
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 48
Needle is installed incorrectly. 48
Needle is defective. 48
Dust or lint has collected under the needle plate. 176
Thin or stretch fabrics are being used. 70
No stitching
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 48
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 40
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
High-pitched sound while sewing
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 48
Dust or lint is caught in the feed dogs. 176
Pieces of thread are caught in the race. 176
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
TROUBLESHOOTING
185
Appendix
7
■ After Finishing an Operation
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not being used.
36
There are needle holes or friction scratches in the
bobbin case.
176
Fabric does not feed through the machine.
Feed dogs are set in the down position.
• Press , and then turn the handwheel to
raise the feed dogs.
80
Stitches are too close together. 62
Wrong presser foot. 194
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 48
Thread is entangled.
180
Zigzag foot “J” is slanted on a thick seam at the
beginning of stitching.
69
The fabric feeds in the opposite direction.
The feed mechanism is damaged.
*
The needle contacts the needle plate.
The needle clamp screw is loose. 48
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 48
Fabric being sewn with the machine cannot be
removed.
Thread is tangled below the needle plate. 179
A broken needle has fallen into the machine.
• Turn off the machine, and then remove the
needle plate. If the needle that fell into the
machine can be seen, use tweezers to remove
it. After removing the needle, return the needle
plate to its original position.
Before turning on the machine, slowly turn the
handwheel toward you to check that it turns
smoothly. If the handwheel does not turn
smoothly or the needle that fell into the
machine cannot be removed, consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
180
The handwheel feels sluggish when it is turned.
Thread is tangled in the bobbin case. 179
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Thread tension is incorrect.
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 40
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
49
Presser foot holder is not attached correctly. 50
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 62, 143
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. 36
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 48
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not being used.
36
Character or decorative stitch patterns are misaligned.
Stitch pattern adjustment settings were set
incorrectly.
97
Stitch pattern does not turn out.
Wrong presser foot. 194
Did not use a stabilizer material on thin fabrics or
stretch fabrics.
70
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 62, 143
Fabric was pulled, pushed or fed at an angle while
it was being sewn.
• Sew while guiding the fabric with your hands so
that the fabric is fed in a straight line.
56
The thread is tangled, for example, in the bobbin
case.
179
TROUBLESHOOTING
186
The pattern is not embroidered correctly.
Thread is twisted.
—
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 62, 143
Fabric was not inserted into the frame correctly
(fabric was loose, etc.).
128
Stabilizing material was not attached.
• Always use stabilizing material, especially with
stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, fabrics with a
coarse weave, or fabrics that often cause
pattern shrinkage. See your authorized Brother
dealer for the proper stabilizer.
127
There was an object placed near the machine, and
the carriage or embroidery frame hit the object
during embroidering.
107
Fabric outside the frame edges interferes with the
arm, so the embroidery unit cannot move.
• Reinsert the fabric in the embroidery frame so
that the excess fabric is away from the arm, and
rotate the pattern 180 degrees.
128
Fabric is too heavy, so the embroidery unit cannot
move freely.
• Place a large thick book or similar object under
the arm head to lightly lift the heavy side and
keep it level.
—
Fabric is hanging off the table.
• If the fabric is hanging off the table during
embroidery, the embroidery unit will not move
freely. Place the fabric so that it does not hang
off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from
dragging.
135
Fabric is snagged or caught on something.
• Stop the machine and place the fabric so that it
does not get caught or snagged.
—
Embroidery frame was removed during
embroidering (for example, to reset the bobbin).
The presser foot was bumped or moved while
removing or attaching the embroidery frame, or the
embroidery unit was moved.
138
Stabilizer is incorrectly attached, for example, it is
smaller than the embroidery frame.
127
Loops appear on the surface of the fabric when
embroidering
The thread tension is incorrectly set.
143
The tension of the upper thread is incorrectly set
for the combination of the fabric, thread and
pattern being used.
• Use the embroidery needle plate cover.
135
The combination of the bobbin case and bobbin
thread is incorrect.
134
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
ERROR MESSAGES
187
Appendix
7
Below is an explanation of error messages. Refer to these when necessary (if you press or do the operation
correctly while the error message is displayed, the message disappears).
ERROR MESSAGES
Error messages Cause/solution
1
Attach the embroidery frame. This message is displayed when the machine is ready to embroider pattern,
and the “Start/Stop” button is pushed while the embroidery frame is not
attached.
2
Cannot change the configuration of the characters. This message is displayed when there are too many characters and the
curved character configuration is impossible.
3
Cannot embroider since the embroidery unit is not
attached. Turn off the machine, and then attach the
embroidery unit.
This message is displayed when the “Start/Stop” button is pushed and the
machine is in embroidery mode, but the embroidery unit is not attached.
4
Cannot recognize the data for the selected pattern.
The data may be corrupted.
This message is displayed when there is a possibility that the data for the
selected embroidery pattern is corrupted.
5
Change to a larger embroidery frame. This message is displayed when the machine is in embroidery mode and the
small frame is attached, and the selected pattern does not fit in the small
frame.
6
Check and rethread the upper thread. This message is displayed when the upper thread is broken or not threaded
correctly, and the “Start/Stop” button, (reverse stitch button) or
(reinforcement stitch button) is pressed.
7
Data volume is too large for this pattern. This message is displayed when the stitch patterns you are editing take up
too much memory, or if you are editing too many stitch patterns for the
memory.
8
Failed to save file. This message appears when you try to save more than 100 settings screen
image files in the USB media. In this case, delete a file from the USB media
or use different USB media.
9
In twin needle mode, the automatic needle
threading button cannot be used.
This message is displayed when the automatic needle threading button is
pushed while twin needle mode is selected.
10
Includes a special pattern that cannot be saved to
external memory. Save the pattern in the machine's
memory.
This message is displayed when you try to save a copyright protected
pattern to USB media.
According to copyright laws, patterns that are illegal to reproduce or edit
cannot be saved to USB media. If this message displays, save the pattern in
the machine’s memory.
11
Lower the buttonhole lever. This message is displayed when the buttonhole lever is up, a buttonhole
stitch is selected, and the “Start/ Stop” button, (reverse stitch button) or
(reinforcement stitch button) is pushed.
12
Lower the presser foot lever.
This message is displayed when (Presser foot lifter button) is pushed
while the presser foot lever is raised/the needle is lowered.
13
Make sure embroidery frame is moved as far back
as possible. LOCK DOWN THE FRAME-SECURING
LEVER.
This message is displayed when the embroidery frame is attached.
14
No more patterns can be added to this
combination.
This message is displayed when you cannot combine patterns.
15 No more stitches can be combined. This message is displayed when you try to combine more than 71 patterns.
16
Not enough available memory to save the data.
Delete some patterns or use a different media.
This message is displayed when the memory is full and the stitch pattern or
embroidery pattern cannot be saved.
17
Not enough available memory to save the pattern.
Delete another pattern?
This message is displayed when the memory is full and the stitch pattern or
embroidery pattern cannot be saved.
18
OK to cancel the current pattern selection?
This message is displayed when, after selecting a pattern, is pressed
and the pattern is about to be deleted.
ERROR MESSAGES
188
19
OK to cancel the current stitch selection? This message is displayed when, after selecting a stitch pattern,
, , or is pressed and the stitch pattern is
about to be deleted.
20 OK to delete the selected picture? This message is displayed when the image is deleted.
21
OK to delete the setting?
This message appears when or is pressed to delete the
settings for a utility stitch. To delete the selected settings, press .
22
OK to move the embroidery carriage to its previous
position?
This message is displayed when replacing the embroidering bobbin thread.
23
OK to recall and resume previous memory? This message appears if the machine is turned off while embroidering, then
turned on again. Press to return the machine to the condition (pattern
position and number of stitches) when it was turned off. Follow the
procedure described in “If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Runs out of
Thread During Embroidering” on page 138 to align the needle position and
embroider the remainder of the pattern.
24
OK to revert to previous color changes?
This message is displayed when is pressed when changing thread
colors.
25
OK to separate the combined border pattern? This message is displayed when rotating a saved combined pattern in the
embroidery screen.
26
Pattern extends to the outside of embroidery frame. This message is displayed when the machine is in embroidery mode, and the
character pattern combination is too large to fit in the embroidery frame.
27
Pattern extends to the outside of embroidery frame.
If you plan to add more patterns, rotate the pattern
combination.
This message is displayed when the machine is in embroidery mode and the
combined character pattern is too large for the embroidery frame. You can
rotate the pattern 90 degrees and continue combining characters.
28
Preventive maintenance is recommended. This message is displayed when the machine needs to be maintained.
Once this message appears, it is recommended to take your machine to an
authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother authorized service center for
a regular maintenance check. Although this message will disappear and the
machine will continue to function once you press , the message will
display several more times until the appropriate maintenance is performed.
29
Raise the buttonhole lever. This message is displayed when the buttonhole lever is down, a stitch other
than a buttonhole is selected, and the “Start/ Stop” button, (reverse
stitch button) or (reinforcement stitch button) is pushed.
30
Remove Dual Feed module from the machine. This message appears when you try to start embroidering with the dual feed
foot attached to the machine. Remove the dual feed foot before entering the
embroidery mode.
31
Remove Embroidery foot with LED pointer from the
machine.
This message appears when you try to start sewing utility stitches or
character/decorative stitches with the embroidery foot with the LED pointer
attached to the machine.
Remove the embroidery foot with the LED pointer before entering the sewing
mode.
32
Select a pattern. This message is displayed when there is no embroidery pattern selected and
the “Start/Stop” button, (reverse stitch button) or (reinforcement
stitch button) is pressed.
33
Select a stitch. This message is displayed when there is no stitch pattern selected and the
“Start/Stop” button, (reverse stitch button) or (reinforcement stitch
button) is pressed.
34
Set the clock. This message appears when the time/date is not set. Set time/date.
(page 22)
35
The "Start/Stop" button does not operate with the
foot controller attached. Remove the foot controller.
This message is displayed when the “Start/Stop” button is pushed to sew
Utility stitches or Character/Decorative stitches while the foot controller is
connected. (This message does not appear when embroidering).
Error messages Cause/solution
ERROR MESSAGES
189
Appendix
7
36
The bobbin thread is almost empty. This message is displayed when the bobbin thread is running out.
Although a few stitches can be sewn when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed,
replace with a wound bobbin immediately. When embroidering, press ,
press , remove the embroidery frame, and then replace the bobbin
with one wound with plenty of embroidery bobbin thread.
If [Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor] in the general settings screen of the
machine setting mode is set to [OFF], this message does not appear.
37
The bobbin winder safety device has activated. Is
the thread tangled?
This message is displayed when the bobbin is being wound, and the motor
locks because the thread is tangled, etc.
38
The carriage of the embroidery unit will move. Keep
your hands etc. away from the carriage.
This message is displayed when the embroidery unit is initializing.
39
The safety device was activated since the main
shaft motor was heated. Is the thread tangled?
This message is displayed when the temperature of the motor increases,
activating the safety device. Wait until the temperature decreases. If the error
persists, contact your nearest authorized Brother dealer.
40
The safety device was activated since the main
shaft motor seized. Is the thread tangled?
This message is displayed when the motor locks due to tangled thread or for
other reasons related to thread delivery.
41
The safety device was activated since the needle
position sensor malfunctioned.
This message is displayed when an error in the needle position sensor is
detected, activating the safety device. Turn the machine off, then on again. If
the message continues to appear, the machine may be damaged. Contact
your nearest authorized Brother dealer.
42
The upper thread may not be threaded correctly.
Thread the upper thread from the beginning.
This message is displayed when it seems that the upper thread has not been
threaded correctly.
43
The USB media was changed. Do not change the
USB media while it is being read.
This message is displayed when you attempt to select a stitch pattern after
the USB media in which the stitch pattern is saved has been changed.
44
There is no needle plate cover. Attach a needle
plate cover.
This message is displayed when the needle plate cover is not attached.
45
This editing function cannot be used when the
pattern is out of the red outline. Use this function
after moving the pattern.
This message is displayed when the machine is in embroidery edit mode,
and you try to use an editing function when the pattern is not completely
within the red outline.
46
This file cannot be used. This message appears if the file format is incompatible with this machine.
Check the list of compatible file formats. (page 192)
47
This file exceeds the data capacity and cannot be
used. Use a suitable size file.
This message is displayed when the file size exceeds the data capacity of
the machine.
Confirm the file size and format. (page 192)
48
This key cannot be used at this time.
This message is displayed when you press in the screen
other than the Utility Stitch, or press in the screen other
than the Utility Stitch or Character/Decorative Stitch.
49
This key does not operate when the needle is down.
Raise the needle and press the key again.
This message is displayed when a key on the LCD display is touched while
the needle is in the down position.
50
This stitch is not "Dual Feed Mode" compatible. This message appears when the dual feed foot cannot be used with the
current stitch. Select other stitch.
51 This USB media cannot be used. This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible media.
52
This USB media is incompatible. This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible USB media.
For a list of compatible USB media, visit “ http://s.brother/cpeaa/
”.
53
Turn off the machine before attaching or removing
the needle plate.
This message is displayed when the regular needle plate is replaced with the
straight stitch needle plate while the machine is ON.
54
Turn off the power and replace the needle plate. • This message is displayed when the machine is set to embroidery mode or
utility decorative stitch mode from the home page screen while the straight
stitch needle plate or no needle plate is installed.
• This message is displayed when the straight stitch needle plate is installed
while a stitch pattern that cannot be used with that needle plate is
selected.
55 USB media error This message is displayed when an error occurs with the USB media.
Error messages Cause/solution
ERROR MESSAGES
190
■ Alarm Sounds
If the operation was performed incorrectly, an alarm sounds to indicate that an error occurred. If the operation was performed
correctly, the machine beeps to confirm the operation.
56
Use the presser foot lifter button to lower the
presser foot.
This message is displayed when a button, such as the “Start/Stop” button, is
pushed while the presser foot is raised.
57
Use the presser foot lifter button to raise the presser
foot.
This message is displayed when the embroidery unit is attached and the
power is turned on with the needle in the down position.
58
When the speed controller is set to control the
zigzag stitch width, the "Start/Stop" button does
not operate.
This message is displayed when the speed control lever is set to control the
zigzag stitch width, and the “Start/ Stop” button is pushed. Use the foot
controller to operate the machine.
Memo
• To cancel the operation beep or to change the volume, press and then change the setting for [Machine
Speaker Volume]. Refer to page 28 for more details.
Error messages Cause/solution
ERROR MESSAGES
191
Appendix
7
SPECIFICATIONS
192
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Size and
Weight
Machine
(Box 1 of 2)
Dimensions of machine Approx. 662 mm (W) × 348 mm (H) × 321 mm (D)
(approx. 26-1/16 inches (W) × 13-11/16 inches (H) × 12-5/8
inches (D))
Dimensions of box Approx. 740 mm (W) × 620 mm (H) × 405 mm (D)
(approx. 29-1/8 inches (W) × 24-13/32 inches (H) × 15-15/16
inches (D))
Weight of machine Approx. 17 kg (approx. 37.5 lb)
Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 26.5 kg (approx. 58.4 lb)
Sewing speed 70 to 1050 stitches per minute
Needles Home sewing machine needles (HA × 130)
Embroidery Unit
(Box 2 of 2)
Dimensions of embroidery unit Approx. 595 mm (W) × 139 mm (H) × 524 mm (D)
(approx. 23-7/16 inches (W) × 5-15/32 inches (H) × 20-5/8
inches (D))
Dimensions of machine with
embroidery unit attached
Approx. 916 mm (W) × 348 mm (H) × 524 mm (D)
(approx. 36-1/16 inches (W) × 13-11/16 inches (H) × 20-5/8
inches (D))
Dimensions of box Approx. 735 mm (W) × 620 mm (H) × 190 mm (D)
(approx.28-15/16 inches (W) × 24-13/32 inches (H) × 7-15/
32 inches (D))
Weight of embroidery unit Approx. 4.6 kg (approx. 10.1 lb)
Weight of box (for shipping) Approx. 7.1 kg (approx. 15.7 lb)
Total Shipping Weight (Combination of all 2 boxes complete) Approx. 34.5 kg (approx. 76.1 lb)
Data
Precaution
Memory Stitch patterns 1 MB
Embroidery patterns 10 MB
Images can be imported to the
machine (My Design Center)
100 MB
Data Types
Stitch patterns
*1
.pmv .pmx .pmu .pmi
Embroidery patterns
*2
.pes .phc .phx .dst .pen
Data that can be loaded when using
My Design Center
.jpg .png .bmp
Types of USB Devices/
Media that can be
Used
*3
Stitch patterns Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB external
media. Use external media that meets the following
specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
• USB Floppy disk drive
Stitch data can be recalled only from;
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of USB media with the
USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
•Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
•xD-Picture Card
Embroidery patterns Embroidery data can be saved to or recalled from USB
media. Use media that meets the following specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
Embroidery data can be recalled only.
• USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives
You can also use the following types of USB media with the
USB Memory Card Reader/USB card writer module.
• Secure Digital (SD) Card
• CompactFlash
• Memory Stick
•Smart Media
• Multi Media Card (MMC)
•xD-Picture Card
SPECIFICATIONS
193
Appendix
7
*1
“.pmu” stitch data files can be retrieved; however, when the machine is used to save the file, it is saved as a “.pmv” stitch data file.
Using data other than that created using this machine or the machine which create “.pmu” data file, may cause the machine to
malfunction.
*2
• Using data other than that saved using our data design systems or this machine may cause this machine to malfunction.
When the machine is used to save a file with any extension, it is saved as a .phx data file.
• .dst data is displayed in the pattern list screen by file name (the actual image cannot be displayed).
The full file name may not be displayed depending on the number of characters in the file name.
Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific thread color information, it is displayed with our default thread color sequence.
Check the preview and change the thread colors as desired.
*3
• USB media is commercially available, but some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website “ http://
s.brother/cpeaa/ ” for more details.
• Depending on the type of USB devices/media being used, either directly plug the USB device into the machine’s USB port or plug the
USB media Reader/Writer into the machine’s USB port.
* Please be aware that some specifications may change without notice.
Condition of the [Eco
Mode] and [Shutoff
Support Mode]
[Eco Mode] Available time OFF, 10 - 120 (minute)
“Start/Stop”
button
Green flashing
Suspended
function
Machine light, Screen display, LED pointer, Guideline
marker
After recovering The machine starts from the previous operation.
[Shutoff Support
Mode]
Available time OFF, 1 - 12 (hour)
“Start/Stop”
button
Green slow flashing
Suspended
function
All functions
After recovering An error message appears.
You need to turn off and on the machine to restart.
Compatible image files
of the Screen Saver
Image
Format JPEG format (.jpg)
File size Max. 150 KB for each image
File dimension 1280 × 1280 pixels or less (If the width is between 800 and
1279 pixels, the image will be displayed at 800 pixels.)
Number allowed 5 or less
Videos that can be
played
MP4 file format Video - H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Audio – AAC
Size 450 (H) × 800 (W)
Maximum file size 1 GB
CAUTION
• When using embroidery data other than our original patterns, the thread or needle may break when
embroidering with a stitch density that is too fine or when embroidering three or more overlapping
stitches. In that case, use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery data.
Item Specification
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
194
You can use USB media to upgrade software for your
machine.
When an upgrade program is available on “ http://
s.brother/cpeaa/ ”, please download the files following the
instructions on the website and steps below.
a
While pressing (Automatic threading button),
turn the main power to ON.
b
Press .
c
Insert the USB media into the primary (top) USB port
on the machine.
d
Press .
When upgrading is finished, the completion message
appears.
e
Turn the machine off, remove the USB media, and turn
the machine on again.
*
Twin needle can be used by attaching zigzag foot “J”.
UPGRADING YOUR MACHINE’S
SOFTWARE
Note
• When using USB media to upgrade the software,
check that no data other than the upgrade file is
saved on the USB media being used before
starting to upgrade.
STITCH SETTING CHART
Memo
• When any of the following stitches (reverse stitch
patterns and reinforcement stitch patterns) are
selected, pressing (Reverse stitch button) will
sew reverse stitches.
When any other stitch is selected, pressing
(Reverse stitch button) will sew reinforcement
stitches.
• The stitch pattern symbols indicate the following.
1 Reverse stitch pattern
2 Reinforcement stitch pattern
Note
• The presser foot that is displayed on each screen
when Free motion mode is OFF/ON is shown in the
table under “Presser foot”.
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
J*/O
Straight stitch (Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Straight stitch (Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Straight stitch (Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Straight stitch (Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Triple stretch stitch
General sewing for
reinforcement and
decorative topstitching
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
1
2 2
1
STITCH SETTING CHART
195
Appendix
7
J*/O
Stem stitch
Reinforced stitching,
sewing and decorative
applications
1.0 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching, top
stitching
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Basting stitch
For basting.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
20 (3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-1/4)
J*/O
Zigzag stitch
For overcasting, mending.
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
J*/O
Zigzag stitch
For overcasting, mending.
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
J*/O
Zigzag stitch (Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at
left.
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4 (1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Zigzag stitch (Left)
Start from left needle
position, zigzag sew at
right.
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4 (1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
2 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium
weight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
2 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium
weight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
3 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
G
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of light and
medium weight fabrics
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
G
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of
heavyweight fabric
5.0 (3/16)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
G
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of medium,
heavyweight and easily
friable fabrics or
decorative stitching.
5.0 (3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforced seaming of
stretch fabric
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of medium
stretch fabric and
heavyweight fabric,
decorative stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative
stitching
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
J/O
Overcasting stitch
Stretch knit seam
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Single diamond overcast
Reinforcement and
seaming stretch fabric
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Single diamond overcast
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.8 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
S
With side cutter
Straight stitch while
cutting fabrics
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 2.5
(0 - 3/32)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
S
With side cutter
Zigzag stitch while cutting
fabrics
3.5 (1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
S
With side cutter
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
3.5 (1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
S
With side cutter
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
S
With side cutter
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Piecing stitch (Right)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
right seam allowance
5.5 (7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/C
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
—
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Piecing stitch (Left)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
1.5 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
when using transparent
nylon thread for the upper
thread and a thread color
matching the quilt for the
bobbin thread.
Sew with a tight thread
tension so that the bobbin
thread is visible from the
right side of the fabric.
Use a needle between 90/
14 and 100/16.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Quilting appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting
and sewing on appliqué
quilt pieces
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
J/O
Quilting appliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching
binding
1.5 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.8 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
196
J/O
Quilting stippling
Background quilting
7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
R
Blind hem stitch
Hemming woven fabrics
* The stitch width setting
is in neither millimeters
nor inches.
00
3 - 3
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
R
Blind hem stitch stretch
Hemming stretch fabric
* The stitch width setting
is in neither millimeters
nor inches.
00
3 - 3
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Blanket stitch
Appliqués, decorative
blanket stitch
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Blanket stitch
Appliqués, decorative
blanket stitch
2.5 (3/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Shell tuck edge
Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Satin scallop stitch
Decorating collar of
blouse, edge of
handkerchief
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.1 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Scallop stitch
Decorating collar of
blouse, edge of
handkerchief
7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Patchwork join stitch
Patchwork stitches,
decorative stitching
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Patchwork double
overlock stitch
Patchwork stitches,
decorative stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Couching stitch
Decorative stitching,
attaching cord and
couching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Smocking stitch
Smocking, decorative
stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Feather stitch
Fagoting, decorative
stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Fagoting cross stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Tape attaching
Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Ladder stitch
Decorative stitching
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
J*/O
Rick-rack stitch
Decorative top stitching
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
1.0 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
5.5 (7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Serpentine stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stippling
stitch
Decorative stitching
7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, triple
straight at left
1.0 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, triple
straight at center
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching zigzag
Decorative hems, top
stitching
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, lace
attaching pin stitch
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems
3.0 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems daisy
stitch
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Honeycomb stitch
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
197
Appendix
7
N*/O
Honeycomb stitch
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems and
bridging stitch
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems.
Fagoting, attaching ribbon
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems,
smocking
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems,
smocking
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems,
smocking
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Ladder stitch
Decorative hems.
Fagoting, attaching ribbon
7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
A
Narrow rounded
buttonhole
Buttonhole on light to
medium weight fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Wide round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra
space for larger buttons
5.5 (7/32)
3.5 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Tapered round ended
buttonhole
Reinforced waist tapered
buttonholes
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical
bar tack in heavyweight
fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
A
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with bar tack
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Round double ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes for fine,
medium to heavyweight
fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Narrow squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes for light to
medium weight fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Wide squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra
space for larger
decorative buttons
5.5 (7/32)
3.5 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Squared buttonhole
Heavy-duty buttonholes
with vertical bar tacks
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Stretch buttonhole
Buttonholes for stretch or
woven fabrics
6.0 (15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.0 (1/16)
0.5 - 2.0
(1/32 - 1/16)
A
Heirloom buttonhole
Buttonholes for heirloom
and stretch fabrics
6.0 (15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.5 (1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
A
Bound buttonhole
The first step in making
bound buttonholes
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 6.0
(0 - 15/64)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
A
Keyhole buttonhole
Buttonholes in
heavyweight or thick
fabrics for larger flat
buttons
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Tapered keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes in medium to
heavy weight fabrics for
larger flat buttons
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Keyhole buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical
bar tack for reinforcement
in heavyweight or thick
fabrics
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
N/O
4 steps buttonhole 1
Left side of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0 (3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
N/O
4 steps buttonhole 2
Bar tack of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0 (3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
N/O
4 steps buttonhole 3
Right side of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0 (3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
N/O
4 steps buttonhole 4
Bar tack of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0 (3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Darning
Darning of medium weight
fabric
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
198
A
Darning
Darning of heavyweight
fabric
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
A
Bar tack
Reinforcement at opening
of pocket, etc.
2.0 (1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
0.4 (1/64)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
M
Button sewing
Attaching buttons
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 4.5
(3/32 - 3/16)
—
N/O
Eyelet
For making eyelets, holes
on belts, etc.
7.0 (1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
7.0 (1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
N/O
Star eyelet
For making star-shaped
eyelets on holes.
——
N/O
Diagonally left up
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Reverse (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Diagonally right up
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Sideways to left
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N/O
Sideways to right
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N/O
Diagonally left down
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Forward (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Diagonally right down
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Sideways to left (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N/O
Sideways to right
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
N/O
Forward (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Reverse (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
J/C
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
—
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Piecing stitch (Right)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
right seam allowance
5.50 (7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Piecing stitch (Left)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
1.50 (1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
stitch
3.50 (1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Basting stitch
Basting
3.50 (1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
20 (3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-1/4)
J/O
Stem stitch
Reinforced stitching,
sewing and decorative
applications
1.00 (1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Quilting appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting
and sewing on appliqué
quilt pieces
3.50 (1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
J/O
Zigzag stitch (Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at left
3.50 (1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6 (1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Zigzag stitch (Left)
Start from left needle
position, zigzag sew at
right
3.50 (1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6 (1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
2 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium
weight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
3 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Quilting appliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching
binding
2.00 (1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Shell tuck edge
Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Blanket stitch
Appliqués, decorative
blanket stitch
3.50 (1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
199
Appendix
7
J/O
Quilting stippling
Background quilting
7.00 (1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Overcasting stitch
Stretch knit seam
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Tape attaching
Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
5.50 (7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Serpentine stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Feather stitch
Fagoting, decorative
stitching
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Fagoting cross stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Couching stitch
Decorative stitching,
attaching cord and
couching
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.2 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Patchwork double
overlock stitch
Patchwork stitches,
decorative stitching
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Smocking stitch
Smocking, decorative
stitching
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Rick-rack stitch
Decorative top stitching
4.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.00 (15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
5.50 (7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems and
bridging stitch
6.00 (15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Single diamond overcast
Reinforcement and
seaming stretch fabric
6.00 (15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative
stitching
4.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
X
Free motion couching
stitch
Free motion couching
stitch
3.50 (1/8)
2.75 - 3.75
(3/32 - 1/8)
–
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
INDEX
200
INDEX
A
Accessories
included accessories
................................................................ 15
options
..................................................................................... 18
Accessory compartment
............................................................... 14
Adjustments
screen
.................................................................................... 177
Air vent
........................................................................................ 12
Alarm sounds
............................................................................. 190
Alphabet characters
embroidery
............................................................................ 110
Appliqué
quilting
.................................................................................... 79
using an embroidery frame pattern
......................................... 151
Arrow keys
................................................................................. 101
Automatic fabric sensor system
.................................................... 67
Automatic thread cutting key
....................................................... 64
Automatic threading button
................................................. 13, 42
B
Ball point needle .......................................................................... 49
Bar tacks
...................................................................................... 92
Blind hem stitches
........................................................................ 83
Block move key
......................................................................... 102
Bobbin
pulling up the bobbin thread
.................................................... 41
setting
...................................................................................... 40
winding
.................................................................................... 36
Bobbin case
cleaning
................................................................................. 176
Bobbin clip
.................................................................................. 14
Bobbin cover
............................................................................... 12
Bobbin threading
pulling up the bobbin thread
.................................................... 41
setting the bobbin
.................................................................... 40
winding the bobbin
.................................................................. 36
Bobbin winder
............................................................................. 12
Bobbin winding switch
................................................................ 38
Border key
....................................................................... 117, 119
Button sewing
.............................................................................. 93
4 hole buttons
.......................................................................... 93
shank
....................................................................................... 93
Buttonhole lever
.......................................................................... 12
Buttonholes
four-step
................................................................................... 90
odd-shaped/buttons that do not fit the button holder plate
....... 90
one-step
................................................................................... 88
C
Character/Decorative Stitches
adjustments
.............................................................................. 97
retrieving
.................................................................................. 99
saving
...................................................................................... 99
Cleaning
race
........................................................................................ 176
Clock
........................................................................................... 22
Color shuffling function
............................................................. 123
Cord guide bobbin cover
............................................................. 76
D
Darning ....................................................................................... 91
Dart seam
.................................................................................... 73
Denim
......................................................................................... 49
Dual feed foot
.............................................................................. 51
E
Echo quilting ............................................................................... 82
Eco mode
.................................................................................... 29
Editing
embroidery edit
..................................................................... 114
Embroidery
adjusting the speed
................................................................ 147
automatic thread cutting function (End color trim)
................. 146
key functions
......................................................................... 126
resuming embroidery after turning off the power
................... 138
selecting patterns
................................................................... 108
thread color display
............................................................... 147
thread trimming function (Jump stitch trim)
............................ 146
Embroidery appliqué
................................................................. 136
Embroidery edit
changing the thread color
...................................................... 122
key functions
......................................................................... 114
repeated patterns
................................................................... 117
Embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer
................................... 106
Embroidery frames
attaching
............................................................................... 130
inserting fabric
....................................................................... 128
removing
............................................................................... 130
types
...................................................................................... 128
using the embroidery sheet
.................................................... 129
Embroidery needle plate cover
.................................................. 135
Embroidery patterns
checking the position
............................................................ 133
editing
................................................................................... 114
embroidering
......................................................................... 134
linked characters
................................................................... 148
retrieving
............................................................................... 150
saving
.................................................................................... 150
selecting
................................................................................ 108
using a frame pattern to make an appliqué
............................ 151
Embroidery sheet
....................................................................... 129
Embroidery unit
......................................................................... 107
Error messages
........................................................................... 187
Eyelet
.......................................................................................... 94
F
Fabric .......................................................................................... 49
Fabrics
sewing heavyweight fabrics
..................................................... 69
sewing lightweight fabrics
....................................................... 70
sewing stretch fabrics
....................................................... 70, 89
Fagoting
...................................................................................... 86
Favorite color scheme
............................................................... 124
Feed dogs
............................................................................. 12, 80
Flat bed attachment
............................................................ 12, 107
Flat fell Seam
............................................................................... 74
Foot controller
...................................................................... 12, 58
Free motion quilting
free motion echo quilting foot “E”
........................................... 82
free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
.................................... 81
free motion quilting foot “C”
................................................... 80
Free motion sewing mode
........................................................... 80
G
Gathering .................................................................................... 74
Grid direction key
..................................................................... 101
Guideline marker
........................................................................ 64
H
Handle ........................................................................................ 12
Handwheel
................................................................................. 12
INDEX
201
Appendix
7
Heirloom ..................................................................................... 87
Hemstitching
daisy stitch
............................................................................... 87
Home page screen
....................................................................... 23
I
Image key .................................................................................. 116
Insert key
................................................................................... 102
K
Key functions
embroidery
............................................................................ 126
embroidery edit
..................................................................... 114
MY CUSTOM STITCH
........................................................... 101
utility stitches
........................................................................... 25
Knee lifter
............................................................................ 12, 66
L
L/R Shift ....................................................................................... 62
LCD screen
.......................................................................... 12, 23
light
......................................................................................... 28
Leather
........................................................................................ 70
M
Machine help key ........................................................................ 31
Main power switch
...................................................................... 12
Metallic thread
............................................................................ 37
MPEG-4 (MP4) videos
................................................................. 32
Multi-directional sewing
.............................................................. 94
MY CUSTOM STITCH
............................................................... 100
retrieving
............................................................................... 103
My Design Center
...................................................................... 156
N
Needle ........................................................................................ 49
changing the needle
................................................................ 48
changing the needle position
................................................... 72
mode
....................................................................................... 24
twin needle
.............................................................................. 45
Needle bar thread guide
...................................................... 12, 45
Needle mode selection key
......................................................... 45
Needle plate
................................................................................ 12
Needle position
................................................................... 67, 72
Needle position button
................................................................ 13
O
Operation buttons ............................................................... 12, 13
Overcasting
................................................................................. 76
P
Piecing ........................................................................................ 77
1/4 quilting foot with guide
...................................................... 78
Pintuck
........................................................................................ 75
Pivoting
....................................................................................... 65
Power cord
.................................................................................. 22
Power cord receptacle
................................................................. 12
Presser foot
pressure
................................................................................... 67
removing
................................................................................. 50
types
...................................................................................... 194
Presser foot code
....................................................................... 125
Presser foot holder
............................................................... 12, 50
Presser foot holder screw
............................................................. 12
Presser foot lever
................................................................. 12, 69
Presser foot lifter button
............................................................... 13
Presser foot/Needle exchange key
................................ 45, 48, 50
Pretension disk
............................................................. 12, 37, 39
Q
Quilting ....................................................................................... 77
free motion
.............................................................................. 80
with satin stitches
..................................................................... 79
R
Race .......................................................................................... 176
Reinforcement stitch
.................................................................... 59
Reinforcement stitch button
......................................................... 13
Repeated patterns
...................................................................... 117
Retrieving
character/decorative stitch patterns
.......................................... 99
embroidery patterns
............................................................... 150
machine’s memory
......................................................... 99, 150
MY CUSTOM STITCH designs
............................................... 103
stitch settings
............................................................................ 63
utility stitches
........................................................................... 63
Reverse stitch button
.................................................................... 13
Reverse/Reinforcement stitches
.................................................... 59
S
Satin stitches ................................................................................ 79
Saving
character/decorative stitches
.................................................... 99
embroidery patterns
............................................................... 150
machine’s memory
......................................................... 99, 150
stitch settings
............................................................................ 63
utility stitches
........................................................................... 63
Scallop stitches
............................................................................ 85
Screen saver
................................................................................. 30
Set key
....................................................................................... 101
Settings
automatic thread cutting
................................................ 64, 146
embroidery settings
.................................................................. 29
general settings
........................................................................ 28
machine settings key
................................................................ 27
sewing settings
......................................................................... 27
stitch length
............................................................................. 62
stitch width
.............................................................................. 62
thread tension
................................................................ 62, 143
thread trimming
..................................................................... 146
Sewing speed controller (speed control slide)
............... 12, 13, 56
Sewing type selection key
............................................................ 31
Shelltuck stitches
......................................................................... 85
Shutoff support mode
................................................................... 29
Single/Triple stitching key
.......................................................... 102
Smocking stitches
........................................................................ 85
Speaker
........................................................................................ 28
Specifications
............................................................................. 192
Spool cap
..................................................................................... 12
Spool net
..................................................................................... 37
Spool pin
..................................................................................... 12
Spool stand
.......................................................................... 39, 46
Stabilizer
.................................................................................... 127
Start/Stop button
.......................................................................... 13
Starting point key
....................................................................... 148
Step stitch patterns
....................................................................... 98
Stitch setting chart
...................................................................... 194
Straight stitch foot
........................................................................ 67
Straight stitch needle plate
........................................................... 67
Straight stitches
............................................................................ 72
Supplemental spool pin
............................................... 12, 36, 45
T
Tape or elastic attaching .............................................................. 86
Terms of Use
.................................................................................. 6
Thread
......................................................................................... 49
thread tension
................................................................ 62, 143
Thread color display
.................................................................. 147
Thread color palette
................................................................... 122
Thread cutter
....................................................................... 12, 58
INDEX
202
Thread cutter button .................................................................... 13
Thread guide
......................................................... 12, 37, 39, 45
Thread guide plate
....................................................... 12, 39, 42
Thread marks
............................................................................. 119
Touch pen
......................................................................... 23, 178
Transparent nylon thread
............................................. 37, 38, 49
Trial key
..................................................................................... 133
Troubleshooting
......................................................................... 178
Tutorial video
.............................................................................. 31
Twin needle
................................................................................. 45
U
Upgrading .................................................................................. 194
Upper thread
............................................................................... 49
Upper threading
twin needle mode
.................................................................... 45
using the Automatic threading button
....................................... 42
USB mouse
.................................................................................. 35
USB port
...................................................................................... 12
Utility stitches
key functions
............................................................................ 25
pattern explanation key
............................................................ 32
retrieving
.................................................................................. 63
saving
...................................................................................... 63
sewing type selection key
......................................................... 31
stitch setting chart
.................................................................. 194
V
Vinyl fabrics ................................................................................. 70
W
Walking foot ................................................................................ 50
Z
Zigzag stitches ............................................................................. 76
Zipper insertion
centered
................................................................................... 95
side
.......................................................................................... 95
English
882-W70
Please visit us at http://s.brother/cpeaa/ where you can
get product support and answers to frequently asked
questions (FAQs).
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or
their dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.
Be sure to install the latest software.
A variety of functional improvements are being performed in the latest version.
Brother SupportCenter is a mobile app that provides the support information for
your Brother product.
Version B
